GIFT OF A lb in Putzker Digitized by tine Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.arGhive.org/details/elementarygrammaOOfontrich AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAU Grrccr^ OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE PROGRESSIVELY ARRANGED FOR THE USE SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES BY G. B. rONTANA. NEW YOEK: D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, C49 & 551 BROADWAY. 1877. 770 f(on lutci-ed according to Act of Congress, in the yeai 1858, by G. B. FONTANA, lu Uie Clerk'8 Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusctte. PREFACE The study of languages offers to a discriminating observer not only a collection of words and idioms, but the knowledge of customs, tastes, and national peculiarities. It is true that there are general prin- ciples which may be applied in common to all lan- guages, — the system of ideas having everywhere the same foundation, — but these are, in their appli- cation, subjected to conditions peculiar to each peo- ple. The formation of words, the construction of phrases, and the modulation of sounds, are but the results of the national character pervading the minutest details of a language. The Italian language, like all others, has national characteristics. The strength of its metaphors, the conciseness of its phrases, its flexible adaptability to thought, its sonorous terminations, expressive articiv lation, and musical prosody, are the living monu- ments of a people eminently artistic, and endowed with a high organic sensibility. Their early oppo- Bition to foreign despotism, and triumph oyer bar- barism during the political struggles of forty Italian 567177 IV PREFACE. republics; created an elegant, energetic, and express- ive language, possessing an innate nobleness and beauty. A logical and philosophical method is therefore necessary to impart the Italian language, as well as intelligence, memory, and a musical ear, on the part of the learner. The latter attainments are often to be found, but there is no Italian grammar within my knowledge which combines all the requisites of a clear and concise treatise ; some aiming to teach the classical tongue of the thirteenth century, others to give the mechanical translation of words and phrases, without rules and precepts. The object of this work is to present the elements of the language as it is spoken to-day, in its simplest garb, both theoretically and practically. The grammar is divided into two parts, embracing sixty lessons and sixty exercises. The first part is «.xclusively given to rules indispensable to a general idea of the language; the second is framed for those who are desirous of having an insight into its theory, and consists of synonyms, maxims, idioms, and figurative expressions. The student will thus 1)0 enabled to observe the distinctive features of t lie two languages : the strength and gravity of the Engh'sh — man, in his full vigor; the softness and elegance of the Italian — woman, in her perfect beauty. ^ 0. B. F. INTRODUCTION. To begin a course of lessons in Italian with the arti- cle, and, after having stated that il is used for the mas- culine gender, and la for the feminine, to call upon the pupil for an exercise, is not at all logical. The pupil must first know that lihro, a book, is of the masculine gender, because ending in o, and tavola, a table, of the feminine gender, because ending in a; and then he can properly apply the article, and say il lihro, la tavola. The method adopted in this grammar consists in not introducing any part of speech, except a few connecting words, without having first given its appropriate rule. The first lesson is therefore exclusively given to gen- ders of nouns. As the pupil knows nothing but the genders, he can write no exercise ; hence, no exercise is attached to the first lesson. In the second lesson the pupil finds the article, the personal pronouns, and the auxiliary verb to have. These, together with his previous knowledge of the gender of nouns, give him material enough to write a sen- tence ; consequently, he is furnished with an exercise. The third lesson embraces the plural of nouns : not all the rules for the formation of the plural, but simply those necessary to one commencing the language. The remaining rules are introduced after things more import- ant and useful to a beginner have been considered. n INTRODUCTION. Progressing thus gradually aud methodically, the pupil becomes familiar with the language in a short time, and without much effort. The irregular verbs, which in other grammars occupy one third, and sometimes half of the book, have been gimplified and reduced to rules, which are given in a single lesson. The indefinite pronouns have been placed in three classes : those used for persons, those for things, and those for persons* and things. In Italian dictionaries some English words are found with two or more corresponding Italian words, which would naturally lead the pupil to use indiscriminately the one or the other ; yet no two words have, in Italian, precisely the same import. The directions for the proper ■use of these synonyms have been given, in the course of the lessons, under the head bearing that caption. No definitions have been given for the various parts of speech, as it is presumed that no one studies the grammar of a foreign language without first knowing that of his own. Several rules common to both languages have not been noticed, to avoid complicating the work. In such cases the pupil can follow the precepts of his own language. Particular pains has been taken to finish the lessons in pages, so that the vocabulary is always found on the same page as the exercise. INTRODUCTION. VII In the arrangement of the vocabularies, the English, and not the Italian words, are placed alphabetically ; for, knowing the Italian word, the pupil has no need of looking it out. The exercises contain words and expressions in com- mon use on topics which constitute daily familiar con- versation. The forty exercises of the first part are pre- ceded by their corresponding vocabulary, so that the pupil can proceed in his study without the aid of a dic- tionary. But if he feels the need of a dictionary, he should procure a good one. Pocket dictionaries are only useful to travellers. When the pupil has acquired a sufficient knowledge of the language to allow him to pass to the second part, he is left free, in applying the rules previously learned, to select those expressions which he thinks most fit to convey the English idea. Consequently, no vocabulary is attached to the lessons. The exercises of the second part are more difficult than the preceding ones. Some of them contain extracts from celebrated poems, translated into plain prose, so that the pupil may compare his Italian translation with the original, which has been inserted for that purpose at the end of the book. Others are biographical sketches of the most prominent among the Italian writers ; by which means the pupil, whilst acquiring the language, may become familiar with the life and works of some of the classic Italian authors, such as Manzoni, Alfieri, Tasso, Petrarch, and the father of the Italian language and literature, Dante Alighieri. ITALIAN GRAMMAR. PRONUNCIATION. The pronunciation of a spoken language can only be acquired perfectly from the voice of a native. An attempt to represent the sounds of one language by the written approximate sounds of another, would fail to give a perfect idea of its peculiarities. It would, therefore, be impossible to give rules and exceptions for the various shades and almost imper- ceptible gradations of some of the Italian sounds. But, as a native Italian teacher is not always to be procured by those desirous of acquiring a knowl- edge of the language, a few general remarks are here given on some of the letters whose pronuncia- tion differs essentially from the English. There are but twenty-one letters in Italian, viz. : A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, L, M, N, ah, be, che, de, a, ef, ge, ahk'kah, e, el, em, en, 0,. P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, Z. o, pe, coo, ajrrr, ess, te, oo, ve, dzata. |[^" W and y do not belong to the Italian alphabet, nor have they any corresponding sound in the language. The k and x are supplied by ch, c, or s ; as, Keel, chiglia ; except, eccetto ; express, espresso. The letter y is almost entirely rejected by modern writers, and is repre- sented by i at the beginning or in the middle of words, or by it at the end ; as, ieri, aiuto, principii, not jeri, ajuto, principj. 2 ^ P.UO^yNCIATIONv VOWELS. The vowels are invariably pronounced as follows: A like the a in father ; ^^^fame^ jpane. E like the e in met ; as, penna^ metto, except at the close of a syllable, when it is somewhat more prolonged and open; as, ^ena, vena.^ The usual way of teaching that the Italian e has, beside the close sound of the e in met, an open sound corresponding to that of the a in fate, has led pupils, particularly in singing, to mispronounce this vowel, giving to it the closing sound of the Italian i. This is an error which should be care- fully avoided. Prolong the e as much as you like, but always give the same sound from the beginning to the end. Say pe-e-e-e-ne, but never ^e-e-e-i-ne. I like the ee in feet ; as, Jine, vino. 0, as pronounced in English, has a terminal sound of the Itahanw; thus, no is really pronounced in English no-u; or, expressed in English sounds, no-oo. The Italian o is pronounced precisely like the first part of the English o, without the teiTninal sound oiu. Pronounce roll, and stop on the middle of the word, and it is i:)recisely the Italian o.* B^ When is preceded by i or w, it is slightly more prolonged and open, but has never the closing sound of the u ; aB,fidret cuore, piove. U like the oo in root ; as, fane, rujje. CONSONANTS. C or g followed by a, o, or u, are pronounced as in Englisli ; but, when followed by e or i, c has the * For wonls with a double moaning, whose real significance is identified by the of tills vowel, sec list, page 226. PRONUNCIATION. 3 Bound of ch in cherry ; as, cenaj cima, and g the sound of g in gem ; as, gemma, giro. 12^ The hard sound of ca, co, cu, and ^a, ^^-0, i;'M, becomes soft by the insertion of an i; as the soft sound of ce, ciy and ge, giyheoome^ hard by the insertion of an h. Thus, they are expressed : The hard sound by cOy che, chiy cOy cu; gay ghey ghiy gOy gu. The soft sound by cihy ce, ci, cioy ciH • giay gey giygioy giu. Gn always forms one syllable, in Italian, and has the sound of m in. poniard; o^Sjignaro, Signore. Gl is pronounced as in English except before i, when it has the sound of II in hrilliant ; as, figlio. S^" Gli has the English sound in negligenzay Angliay Anglicano. H has no sound in Italian; it is only used, 1. To harden the soft sound of c and g. 2. To prolong the sound of the interjections; as, ah 1 ahimel 3. As a mark of distinction in the present of the verb avere, to have. D and t have the English sound, with the differ- ence that in Italian they have a softened character, while in English they both are strongly and mark- edly associated with a somewhat explosive force. Tt or del have the sound of single English t or d. H has the same sound as in English, but at the end of a syllable it is always heard as a distinct letter, being aspirated with a slight snap of the end of the tongue. The two words dardo and dado can never be mistaken in their pronunciation, as is the case in English with the words /ar^Aer and father, because, while in English the r is often pronounced without a ringing close, in Italian it receives its full sound, distinctly showing its presence. 8, at the beginning of words, has the hissing sound as in English ; as, sano, seno, sine, sono, sudo i PRONUNCIATION. S between two vowels, or followed by h, d, r, or t?. is pronounced with a soft sound, somewhat like z j as, hose, casa, sbagliare, sdegnare, sradicare, svolgere. 5^* S retains the sharp, hissing sound, 1. In compound words whose primitive is a word commencing with s ; as, ri-sano. 2. In words with the pronoun si affixed to them ; as, dice-si, crede-si. 3. In adjecti^ es ending in oso, osa, osi, ose ; as, glorioso, gloriosa. Sc followed by e and t, like sh ; as, sceriffo, scisma. Zj like dz in all words which have z in the English word ; as, zona^ zone ; gazetta, gazette. It is pronounced like tz when preceded by I or r, or followed by two vowels, and in nouns ending in zzo, or in verbs whose infinitives end in zzare; as, colza, forza, grazia, azi07ie, ragazzo, spazzo. It has nearly the sound of s in all words ending in anza, enza ; as, speranza, penitenza. Single consonants are generally pronounced soft ; as, fato, caro, pena. Double consonants are pronounced in one sound, but stronger and more marked than when single, by dwelling on the preceding vowel, and pronouncing it with an accent ; thus, fatto, carro, penna, though forming their syllables fat-to, car-ro, pen-na, should be pronounced as if written fd-tto, cd-rro, pe-nna. DIPHTHONGS. Diphthongs are short and long; in each of them the vowels must be distinctly heard, with the differ- «'nco that in the long diphthong each vowel is dis- tinctly articulated, as if making a syllable for itself; as, E'U-rO'pa; in the short diphthong both vowels lire pronounced unitedly and quickly ; as, guancia. ACCENT. Accent, in its common acceptation, is but a sign placed over syllables to show that they must bo uttered more forcibly than the others. The Italians have but one accent, the grave (^), which is gene- rally used to mark the distinction between words otherwise written alike : as, amOj I love ; amo^ he loved ; and also in words which in their origin were written with an additional syllable ; as, bontdj virtu j instead of bontate, virtute. This accent is limited to vowels at the end of a few words ; yet everv word has, in Italian, its unwritten accent, 1 > every word has ^^owel on which the voice must chiefly dwell. This inflection of the voice, this rhythmic accent, being the most marked and the most varied in Italian, is, of course, the most difficult to be acquired by foreigners who are not in immediate correspondence with natives, because harmony can- not be expressed by written words, and yet har- mony is to a language what color is to a picture. It is true that the vowels have, in Italian, an expressive significance : that the open sound of the a and o naturally expresses strength and gravity ; the meagre sound of the e and i, meekness and feebleness ; the obtuse sound of the u, something sad and disagreeable; and that these vowels, prop- erly modified by the sounds of corresponding con- sonants, make the language eminently expressive, 6 ACCENT. and so flexible as to give to the words a distinctive character, and establish an immediate analogy between the sounds and the ideas ; but this power of expression, as in the words rimbombarej ulularCy rugire, fulmine, could not be brought to its height without the necessary proportion of measure in the modulation of articulated sounds. The rhythmic accent-should be considered under two different aspects : 1, as a means to give signifi- cance to a word ; 2, as a means to give harmony to a word. Take, for example, the word ca-pi-to, and pronounce it, giving to each syllable the same quan- tity, and you find that the word has neither meaning nor harmony ; pronounce it as if with an accent on the first vowel, raise the voice on the first syllable, and dwell upon it during the time occupied by the other two (cd-pi-to), and you have given to the word a pleasant modulation, and the meaning of I arrive. Change now the accent from the first to the second syllable, give to it the quantity of the first and third (cajj-i-to), and you have changed, not only the harmony, but also the meaning of the word, which is now understood. Then pronounce the last vowel as if it were accented, give to the last syllable the quantity of the two others {cOrpi-to), and you have given to the word a new harmony and a new mean- ing ; viz.. He arrived. To the above example another may be added, in the word ca-pi4a-no. Pronounce it with the accent on the second a, as ca-pi-td-no, and you have expressed the word captain. Pronounce it with the accent on the first a, as C(i-pi4a-no, and you have changed the meaning of the word into they arrive. ACCENT. 7 From these practical illustrations, it may be seen that the purity of pronunciation, in Italian, is based on the principle of giving to the accented syllable a certainj)ause^ occupying in utterance nearly the same "length of time as that given to the others together, as if the meaning of the word were contained in ^^^£inglo_sjllab]e^ ' Tlii^ is obtained by dwelling on the accented vowel without much prolonging it, and emitting the others rapidly and less forcibly. The accented vowel must, therefore, receive more or less quantity, according to the number of sylla- bles contained in the word. Thus, the syllable cd is properly shorter in cd-pi-to than in cd-pi'ta-no^ because in the former there are but two follow- ing vowels, while in the latter cd is more pro- longed, because followed by three syllables, which must be pronounced in the same length of time as the first. Monosyllables and dissyllables cause no embarrass- ment. Polysyllables are divided into four classes : 1. Parole tronclie (truncated words), ending with accented vowels ; as, scJiiavitu, libertd. 2. Farolepiane (smooth words), with the rhythmic accent on the penultimate. This class is the most numerous in the language, comprising aU the infin- itives ending in are and ^Ve, and the first, second, and third persons singular, and the first and second plural of the past and imperfect tenses of all verbs ; as, perdono, cantarej partire, cantava, cantai. 3. Parole sdrucciole (sliding words), with the rhythmic accent on the antepenultimate, comprising the third person plural of the past and imperfect of all verbs ; as, folgore, amavano, perdettero. 5 ACCENT. 4. Parole bisdrucciole (more sliding words), with the accent on the last syllable but three ; as, dite- melOj ordinano. The predominance of words belonging to each of these classes, according to the ideas the writer wishes to convey, gives to the expressions a flowing smoothness, or a solemn gravity. The two following stanzas from Tasso are given with the object of exemplifying the different influ- ences produced by their rhytl^nic construction. Teneri sdegni e placide e tranquille Repulse e cari vezzi e liete paci, Sorrisi, parolette e dolci stille • Di pianto, e sospir tronchi e moUi baci ; Fuse tai cose tutte, e poscia unille, Ed al fuoco tempro di lente faci, E ne formo quel si mirabil cinto Di ch'ella aveva il bel fianco succinto. Gerus lib., canto 16, 8«'«, 25 Chiama gli abitator delle ombre eterne II rauco suon della tartarea tromba ; Treman le spaziose atre cavern e, E I'aer cieco a quel rumor rimbomba. , , Ne stridendo giammai dalle superne Regioni del cielo il folgor piomba ; Ne si scossa giammai trema la terra Quando i vapori in sen gravida serra. Gerus lib., canto 4, S*'", 3. The number of the vowels e and i, and the liquid sound of the I, make the first stanza smooth and flowing. The predominance of the a, o, and r, makes the second stanza powerful and terrible. The first stanza represents the girdle of a beautiful maid ; the second, the effect of the sound of a trumpet to call the demons to councjl. READING EXERCISE LA ITALIA. QuAL hdvvi terra che il s61e illiimini con Idee piii ser^na o che riscdldi con piii d61ce tepdre I D(5ve un pill vfvido, un piu piiro, un piu spirabil dere si espdnde ? Dove s6rgono ruine piii famdse e piti dtte a congiiin- gere, ad orndre, a rinforzdre la pres^nte bellezza coUe imdgini della passdta pot^nza, di un' antica maestk, di un tempo glorioso invdno dai pdsteri ai loro pddri invi- didto ? A qudl pdrte del mdndo fu concediita una mag- gior c(5pia d^ingdgni, ed a quest! una maggidr attitiidine al ragiondre profdndo e al delicdto sentire ? D6ve si pdrla una lingua che sia piu ricca di chidre pardle e di mddi elettissimi, e che sfa, c6me la ndstra lo e mirabil- mente, id6nea ad esprimere 1 piii sublimi pensieri e gli afiKtti pill teneri; arrendevole a piegdrsi ad ogni deside- rio, ad <5gni bisdgno, ad 6gni volontk, docile a trasc6r- rere per una scdla d'infiniti grddi, dalle armonie piti tenui alle piii grdvi e solenni, dai piii ddlci sudni ai piii concitdti e veemdnti, linico vincolo che tuttavfa con- gidnge le ndstre membra divise, liltima reliquia di una fratelldnza temiita e spenta? Qudl mdi hdvvi ttJrra, 10 READING EXERCISE. c6me la Italica, bagnata da diie mdri; incorondta dalle Alpi, irrigata da mille fonti, frequente di cittk magni- fiche e di amenissime viUe, 6ra stesa in verdi, fecdnde, immense pianiire, dra sorgente in cdlli ridenti per dgni vaghdzza, dra eretta in ampie catene di monti, che nel Idro istdsso selvdggio drrore mdstrano infinite bellezze, c nelle foreste sterminate, e nei gidghi variamente diru- pdti ed aggruppati, e nelle valli fortunate, e nelle acque, ascorrdnti in rfvi frdschi e mdlli, o romoreggianti nei ^"-tOrrdnti, o percaterdtte balzdnti, od inlimpidi laghi chiiise e riposate ? ItaMni, prostrdtevi, venerate questa sdcra terra che vi(ie sdpra sd cdrrere tdnti nemici, tdnti stranidri, tdnte cruddli fazidni, e tante guerre combdt- tersi, e tdnti incdndi, tdnte mdrti, tdnti tradimdnti, tdnte rapine commdttersi, e pur sdmpre rimdse bdlla, vagheg- gidta, desiderdta I Ma bacidndo qudsta cldssioa tdrra, cercdte in dssa con riverdnza le vestigia che i vdstri maggidri v' imprdssero, e segiiitele. ;^<^ ■ -'-^ .:^ ' ( "^J ' • -r ^ .. .• ' ' C , 5^ The following wffrds snould be carefully pronounced and com. mitted to memory. Ugly . Brutto. Why Chi. House Casa. So Cost or si. Sister-in-law . . . Cognata. Brother-in-law. . . Copnato. Easy Facile. Handkerchief . . . Fazzoletto. Wide Largo. Husband Mariio. Not JSTo. Poor Povero. Possible .... Possibile. Looking-glass, . Specchio. Same Stesso. Dear Caro. To spend .... Passare. Next Venturo. As Poiche. Good morning . . Buon giorno PARTS OF SPEECH. LESSON I. NOUNS. 1. Nouns, in Italian, have two Genders, — the Masculine and the Feminine. 2. Nouns ending in a are feminine ; as, JDonna, woman ; penna, pen. Exceptions. 1. Proper names, and nouns expressing rank, titles, and, profes- sions of men ; as, Petrarca, Petrarch ; Papa, Pope ; DucUf Duke ; Profeta, Prophet. 2. Nouns ending in ma derived from the Greek ; as. Climax cli- mate ; idioma, idiom ; poema, poem. N. B. — See list of masculine nouns ending in a, page 223. 3. Nouns ending in o are masculine ; as, UomOj man ; other o, tree. Exceptions. 1. Proper names of women ; as, Saffo^ Sappho ; Calipso, Calypso ; Aletto, Alecto. 2. The words eco, echo, and mano, hand. 3. Nouns abbreviated in poetry ; as. Dido, Dido, instead of Didone ; imago, image, instead of imagine. 4. Nouns ending in e are either masculine or feminine. Nouns appropriate to women, and those ending in ie. tone, dine, and gine, are generally 12 NOUNS. feminine ; as, Nutrice, nurse j superficie, surface ; lezione, lesson ; ancudine^ anvil ; origine, origin ; colazione, breakfast. 5. Nouns ending in me, re, ente, are masculine. Exceptions. — Famey hunger ; spemey hope ; febhrey fever ; col- trey coverlet ; polvere^ dust ; scnrcy axe ; torrcy tower ; gentCy peo- ple ; mente, mind ; sorgentCy spring ; corrente, current. Observation. — Pupils acquainted with Latin or French will find no difficulty in ascertaining the gender of nouns ending in e. Those which come under no given rule will be found in the examples of the following lessons, with the article prefixed. 6. Nouns ending in i are feminine. Exceptions. — Barbagianniy owl ; ecclissi, eclipse ; party peer ; brindisiy toast ; Tamigiy Thames ; diy day, with its compounds. 7. Nouns ending in u are feminine. Exceptions. — GesUy Jesus ; PerUy Peru ; raguy ragout. Observation. — Nouns ending in a and u retain their feminine gender when to these terminations are added de in prose, and te in verse ; e. g., Bonta, virtuy are always of the feminine gender, even when written bontatCy virtutey or bontadey virtude. N. B. — No nouns in the Italian language end in unaccented u. Pupils should commit to memory the following nouns, and ascer- tain their gender by the above rules. VOCABULARY. Axe y Scure. Brass Rame. Butter Burro. Candlestick . . . Candeliere. Chair Sedia. Cheese Cacio. Coat Abito. Fever 4*« Febbre. Flower Fiore. Fork Forchclla. Glass (drinking) Bicchiere. Heart Cuore. Knife Coltello. Oil Olio. Spoon Cucchiaio, Sitgar Zucchero. Table Tavola. Vinegar .... Aceto. Water Acqua. Wine .... Fino. DEFINITE ARTICLE. 13 LESSON II. THE ARTICLE. 8. There are in Italian, as in English, two Arti- cles, — the Definite and the Indefinite. OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 9. The definite article, which in English is em- ployed only to limit the noun, has, in Italian, two uses : — 1, It limits the noun ; and, 2, It shows the gender and number of the noun. 10. The definite article the is expressed in Italian by ilj lo, and la. 11. i7 is placed before nouns of the masculine gender beginning with any consonant except z or s impure, i. e., s followed by a consonant; as, II libro, the book ; il vinOj the wine ; il saUj the salt. 12. Lo is used before masculine nouns beginning with 2, s impure, or a vowel, in which latter case it drops the o and takes an apostrophe ; as, Lo zio^ the uncle ; lo spirito, the spirit ; VamicOj the friend. 13. La is used before feminine nouns ; as. La spada, the sword ; la carta, the paper. Observation. — This feminine form loses the a and takes an apos- trophe when the noun begins with a vowel ; as, L'anima, Verba. N. B. — The vowel is retained before names of countries and king- doms ; as, La America^ la Italia. u DEFINITE ARTICLE. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. /o . . . . . . I. JsToi . . . . . Wc Tu . . . . . Thou. Voi . . , . . You. Egli. . . . . He. Eglino . . . . They, m Ella . . . . . She. Elleno . . . . They,/. Eszo . . . . . He or it Essi . . . . . They. AUXILIARY VERB AVERE, TO HAVE. PBESENT. Ho I have. I Abbiamo ... We have. Hai Thou hast i Avete .... You have. Ha He has. Hanno . . . They have. N. B. — Let the pupil here commit to memory the conjugation of the entire verb. (See page 197.) 14. In an affirmative sentence the verb follows its subject, and must agree with it; as, lo hOj I have ; vol avete, you have ; egli avrd, he shall have. 15. To form a negative sentence, non is placed before the verb ,* as, lo non ho, I have not ; voi non avete, you have not; egli non avrd, he shall not have. 16. To form an interrogative sentence, the sub- ject, whether a noun or a pronoun, must be placed after the verb; as, Ho to? Have I? — Avete voi? Have you? — Avrd egli ? Shall he have ? 17. An interrogative negative sentence is formed by placing non before the verb, and the subject after it; as, Non Jio to? Have I not? — Non avete voi? Have you not? — Non avrd egli? Shall he not have ? DEFINITE ARTICLE. 15 VOCABULARY. And E* Bi-ead . . . . I J Pane. But Ma. Coffee Caffe. Honor Onore. Madam .... Signora. Milk Latte. Miss Signorina. Mr. or Sir . . . . Signore. No JSTo. Odious Odioso. Or O. Passion .... Passione. Penknife .... Temperino„ Pepper Pepe. Salt Sale. Soldier Soldato. Star Stella. Tea Te. Yes Si. * If followed by a vowel, Ed. EXAMPLES. I have the bread. lo ho il pane. Have you the tea ? Avete voi il te ? No, sir, I have not the tea. JVb» Signore, io non ho il ie. Has he the milk ? Ha egli il latte ? He has the milk and the coflfee. Egli ha il latte ed il caffe. lie has not the pepper. Egli non ha il pepe. Have you the salt? Avete voi il sale ? No, sir, I have not the salt. JVo, Signore, io non ho il sale Have you not the knife ? JVoti avete voi il coltello ? Yes, sir, I have the knife. Si, Signore, io ho il coltello. EXERCISE I. Have you the bread ? I have the bread. Have you not the butter ? No, sir ; I have not the butter. Has he the cheese ? He has not the cheese. Have you not the water ? Yes, sir ; we have the water. Have they not the wine ? No, sir ; they have not the wine. Hast thou not the tea ? I have not the tea. Have you the coffee ? No, sir ; I have not the coffee ; they have the coffee. Have they the sugar ? They have not the sugar. Have you not the milk? I have not the milk. Has he the pepper ? He has the pepper and the salt. Has he not the vin- egar ? No, he has not the vinegar ; we have the vinegar. Have I the spoon? No, sir ; you have not the spoon. Have you not the knife ? Yes, sir ; we have the knife and the fork. Have they the water or the wine ? They have the water and the wine. 16 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. LESSON III. FORMATION OF THE PLURAL, PLURAL OP NOUNS. 18. Masculine Nouns form their plural by chang ing the final vowel of the singular into i; as, Papa Pope. Vino Wine. Sale Salt. Papi Popes. Vini Win^ Sali Salts.* 19. Feminine nouns ending in a form their plu- ra;l by changing the a into e ; as, Donna Woman. I Donne Women. Penna Pen. j Penne Pens. 20. Feminine nouns ending in o and e form their plural by changing these vowels into i ; as, Mano Hand. 1 Manx Hands. Madre Mother. | Madri Mothers. 21. Monosyllabic nouns, and nouns ending in t, te, or with an accented vowel, are invariable. Their plural is determined by the article ; as. lire The king. II barhagianni . . The owl. La specie .... The kind. La tirtU .... The virtue. La citta The city. I re The kings. / barbagianni . The owls. Le specie . . . The kinds. Le virtu . . . The virtues. Le cilta . . . The cities. FORMATION OP THE PLURAL. 17 22. The following nouns are irregular in their r)lural : Uomo Man. Bio God. £ue Ox. Moglie Wife. Mille Thousand. Uomini .... Men. Dei Gods. Buoi Oxen. Mogli Wives. Mila Thousands. 23. When several nouns of different gender and number follow each other, the appropriate form of the article must be placed before each ; as, II padre, la madre, ifanciulli e le fanciuUe. The father, mother, boys and girls. PLURAL OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 24. The plural of il is i; as, / libri .... The books. | / vini ..... The wines. 25. The plural of ?o is gli; as, Lo zecchino . . The sequin, j Gli zecchini . The sequins. Lo spirito . . . The spirit. I Gli spiriti . . The spirits. N. B. — Before nouns commencing with an i^ gli loses the i, and takes an apostrophe ; as, GV idioti .... The idiots. | GV ignoranti . The ignorants. 26. The plural of la is le, which drops the e when the noun following it begins with an e ; as, Le spade .... The swords. I Le carte . . . The papers. Le anime . . . The souls.* I L'erbe .... The herbs. N. B. — This vowel is, however, retained in the plural of invariable nouns commencing with c ; thus, i'da, Vereditaj are singular nouns. Le eta, le eredita, are plural nouns. 2 18 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. VOCABULARY. Bird Uccello. Book Libro. Boot Stivale. Cat Gaiio. Dictionary . . . Dizionario. log Cane. English French Grammar Hat . . . Inglese. Francese. Grammaiica. Cappello. Ink . . Inkstand Man . . Neither . Nor . . Umbrella Paper . Pen . . Shoe . . Slipper . Inchiosiro. Calamaio Uomo. JVon, ne.* JVe. Omhrello. Carta. Penna. Scarpa. Pianella, * Non before the verb, ni after it. EXAIilPLES. Have yoTi the knives ? I have neither the knives nor the forks. Has the Englishman the pen- knife and the pens ? He has the penknife, but he has not the pens. Have you the glass ? No, sir ; I have not the glass. I have the boot. Avete voi i coltelli ? lo non ho ne i coltelli ne le for- chetie. Ha V Inglese il temper ino e le penne ? Egli ha il temperino, ma egli noA ha le penne. Avete voi il bicchiere ? JVo, signore; lo non ho il bicchiere. lo ho lo stivale. EXERCISE II. Have you the books ? I have not the books. Have you the pens? I have the pens. Has he not the paper ? He has the paper and the ink. Have you not the knives? We have tho knives, but we have not the forks. Have they not the tables? They have neither the chairs nor the tables. Have I the look- ing-glass ? You have the looking-glass. Hast thou the hats ? I have not the hats. Have I not the oil ? Yes, sir ; you have the oil. Has the Frenchman the paper or the ink? He has neither the paper nor the ink, birt he has the knives and the forks. Has he the glass ? He has neither the glass nor the water. Have you the coats ? No, sir ; we have not the coats. Have you the umbrellas? Yes, sir; we have the umbrellas. Have the English the boots and slippers ? They have the boots and the shoes, but they have not the slippers. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 19 LESSON IV. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 27. Possessive Pronouns are preceded by tlie definite article, and agree in gender and number, not with the possessor, as in English, but with the object possessed; It suomroiZt^^ Lamapenna^^^/^^ POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. MASCULINE. FEMININE. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. •My . . . iZ mio / mie.i. La mia Le mie. Thy. . . II tuo ItuoL La tua Le tue. His, her . II suo I suoi. La sua Le sue. Our . . . II nostro I nostri. La nostra Le nostre. Your . . . II vostro I vosiri. La vostra Le vostre. Their . . . Illoro I loro. La loro Le loro. 28. Possessive pronouns take no article (loro excepted) when immediately followed by a noun in the singular expressing rank or kindred. Your son Vostro figlio. His brother Suo fratello. Your lordship Sua signoria. Their brother H loro fratello. N. B. — The article must be used if the pronoun follows the noun ; if the noun is used in the plural, or in a diminutive form ; if pre- ceded by the words Signore, Signora^ Signorinay or by any adjec- tive ; as. My brothers / miei fratelli. Your brothers / vostri fratelli. My little brother II mio fratellino. My brother II fratello mio. 20 POSSESSIVE PRONOUXS. VOCABULARY. American .... Americano. Brother Fratello. Daughter .... Figlia. Enemy JVemico. Father Padre. Friend Amico. Glove Guanto. Horse Cavallo. Italian Italiano. Life .... . Vita. Mother Moon . Nation . Pencil . Picture Rich . . Remorse Sister . Son . . Work . . Madre. . Luna. . JVazione. . LapiSf maiita . Quadro. . Hicco. . Rimorso. . Sorella. . Figlio. . LavorOf opera. Has my sister her book ? My sister has her book and her pen. Have your friends my dog ? No, sir; they have not your dog, but they have your flowers. Has my brother their birds ? He has your cat, but he has not their birds. EXAMPLES. Ha mia sorella il suo libro ? Mia sorella ha il suo librOy e la sua penna. Hanno i vostri amici il mio cane ? JVb, signore; essi non hanno il vostro cane, ma essi hanno i vostri fiori. Ha mio fratello i loro uccelli. Egli ha il vostro gatlo, ma egli non ha i loro uccelli. EXERCISE III. Have you my pen? No, sir ; I have not your pen. Have you not my book ? I have neither your books nor your pens. Have I not your pencil ? No, sir ; my sister has my pencil. Has my friend your penknife ? He has not your penknife. Have they not his handkerchief? They have not his handkerchief. Have your brothers my flowers ? No, sir ; they have not your flowers. Has your sister my gloves ? Yes, sir ; she has your gloves and your pencil. Has he my paper ? He has not your paper. Have they your chair? They have not your chair. Has your mother my birds? Yes, miss ; she has your birds. Has my sister your picture ? No, sir ; she has not your picture. Has he not my hat ? Yes, sir ; he has your hat and your gloves. Have your friends my horse? No, sir ; they have not your horse, but they have your dog. Has my mother your pencil ? Yes, sir ; she has my pencil, your dictionary, and their grammar. ARTICLES AFFIXED TO PREPOSITIONS. 21 LESSON V. ARTICLES AFFIXED TO PREPOSITIONS. 29. The Articles are aflSxed to certain preposi- tions, with the change, omission, or addition of somo letters. 30. The prepositions most commonly joined to the articles are, c?i, of; a, to ; da^ from ; per^ for con, with ; in, in ; su, on, upon. of"'^ Lot Singular MASCULINE. del dello di il di In FEMININE. della dila Plural. MASCULINE. FEMININK del degli delle di i di gli di le At5 ^ not al ail alio a lo alia a la ai a i agli a gli alle ale Fromthe^^^^ dal dail dallo da lo dalla da la dai dai dagli da gli dalle dale For the \^^, pel per il pello per lo pella per la pel peri pegli per gli pelle per le With the 5 , ^ not col con il coUo con lo colla con la coi con i cogli con gli colle con le In the \ , I not nel in il nello in lo nella in la 71 ei in i negli in gli nelle in le On the \ , I not Sid suil sidlo su lo sulla su la sui su i sugli su gli sulle su le N. B. — The above prepositions may be separated from the article, except con il, con i. — When the article is separated from per^ lo and gli must be used, and never il or i. 22 ARTICLES AFFIXED TO PREPOSITIONS. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS WITH NOUNS. My, our Of my, of our To my, to our From my, from our book. E miOy il nostro Del miOf del nostro Al mio, al nostro Dal miOy dal nostro libra. Mj, our Of my, of our To my, to our From my, from our My, our Of my, of our To thy, to our From his, from their books. pen. / miei, i nostri Dei mieiy dei nostri Ai mieiy ai vostri Dai mieiy dai nostri La miuy la nostra Delia mitty della nostra Alia tuay alia nostra Dalla sutty dalla loro ; libri > penna. My, our Of my, of our To thy, to your From his, from their ^ pens. Le mie, le nostre Delle miCy delle nostre Alle tuCy alle vostre Dalle sue, dalle loro penne. 31. The name of the thing possessed, followed by the preposition dl, always precedes the name of the possessor ; as, John's book, II libro di Giovanni. AUXILIARY VERB ESS ERE y TO BE. lo sono . . . . , I am. JVoi siamo . . . We are. Tu sei , . . . . Thou art. Voi siete . . . . You ara E(/liB . . . . . He is. Eglino sono . . They are. N. B. — The pupil is required to be thoroughly acquainted -with the entire conjugation of this yerb. (See page 197.) ARTICLES AFFIXED TO PREPOSITIONS. 23 VOCABULAEY. Bed Letto. Dish Piatto. Earth Terra. Handkerchief . . Fazzoletto, Humanity . . . Umanita. Husbandman , . Agricoltore. Key Chiave. Meat Carne. Napkin Salvietta. Pianoforte . . . Pianoforte. Room Stanza Rose Rosa. Salad Insalata. Scourge .... Flagello. Store Bottega. Sun Sole. True ...... Vero. Tyrant Tiranno Uncle Zio. Useful Utile. Is the key on the table ? The meat is in the room. My friend has my brother's piano- forte. Is the paper in the book ? Yes, sir; the paper is in the book. EXAMPLES. E la chiave sulla tavola ? La carne e nella stanza. II mio amico ha il pianoforte dt mio fratello. E la carta nel libra. Si, signore ; la carta e nel libra EXERCISE IV. Has my brother your friend's book ? He has neither your friend's book nor your sister's paper. Have I your keys? No, sir ; you have not my keys, but you have my father's penknife. Have they not my daughter's handkerchiefs ? No, sir ; they have not your daughter's handkerchiefs. Has my sister your nap- kin? Your sister has not my napkin. Are the books on the table ? The books are on the table in your room. Your enemy has my brother's knife. Have they my key ? No, sir ; they have not your key, but they have your friend's key. Is my brother in your room ? No, sir : your brother is in my brother's room. Have you the salad '?" 1 have neitner the salad nor the vinegar. Has your daughter my gloves? My daughter has your gloves and your handkerchief. Have you the water or the wine ? I have the water and the wine. Has my brother the bread ? My brother has neither the meat nor the bread. The paper is in my brother's book, and the book is in my sister's room on the table. Have you not their pictures ? Yes, sir ; I have their pictures and your pencU. 24 QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. LESSOK" VI, ADJECTIVES. 82. Adjectives in Italian are variable, and agree with their nouns in gender and number. QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. 33. Adjectives ending in o are masculine ; as, Uomo virtuoso ed onesio. Man virtuous and honest. 34. Adjectives ending in a are feminine ; as, Donna hella e sincera. Woman beautiful and sincere. 35. Adjectives ending in e are of either gender; as, Uomo gentile ed affahile . . . Man gentle and affable. Donna gentile ed affabile . . . Woman gentle and affable. 36. Adjectives ending in o become feminine by changing the o into a ; as, Uomo virtuosOy povero. Donna virtuosa, povera. PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 37. Adjectives ending in o change this vowel into t; as, Uomini virtuosi, poveri. 38. Adjectives ending in a change this vowel into 3 ; as, Donne virtuose, povere. 39. Adjectives ending in e change it into i ; as, Uomo or donna cortese. Uomini or donne cortesi. 40. Adjectives ending in ca and ga have che and gJie in the plural ; thus, lunga, ricca, make lunghe, ricche. QUALIFH^'G ADJECTIVES. 25 41. Adjectives of two syllables, ending in co und go J take clii and ghi in the plural ; thus, ricco, lungOj make ricchi, lunghi. 42. Adjectives of more than two syllables, ending in CO and go, take no 7i, except antico, ancient, and sollngo, solitary, which become anticlii, solingJii. N. B. — The following adjectives may insert or reject the h : PubblicOf public ; pratico, skilful ; mendico, begging ; analogOy anal- ogous ; sofisticOj sophistical ; selvaticoy Ycild ; siiticOy peevish. 43. The adjectives hello, grande, santo, lose the last vowel, and take an apostrophe when followed by a noun commencing with a vowel, and drop the last syllable when followed by any consonant, except z or impure s. Bello specchio Beir anello Bel libro Grande storico Grand' uomo Gran ballo Santo Stefano. SanV Antonio. San Vincenzo. N. B. — The plural ofbel is bei ; that of bello is begli : Bei libri ; begli specchi. Gran is used for both masculine and feminine singu- lar : gran ballo, gran casa. 44. Buono, good, drops the o when the following noun begins with a consonant, except z or s impure. 45. Adjectives may follow or precede the nouns. 46. Adjectives of two syllables generally pre- cede the noun. 47. Adjectives of more than two syllables, and adjectives expressing nationality, color, shape, and taste, or those preceded by molto, much, generally follow the noun ; as. Libra Francese. I Cappello bianco. I Tavola rotonda. I Uva dolce. French book. | White hat. I Round table. | Sweet grapes. 26 QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. VOCABULARY. Beautiful Bcllo. Black JVero. Coach Carrozza. Courteous, kind, . . Cortese. Dress Veste. Fragrant Odoroso. Garden ..... Giardino. Good Buono. Great, large .... Grande. Green Verde. Much, very . . . Molto. Need Bisogno. Nun Monaca. Red Bosso. Roman ..... Bomano. Sleeve Maiiica. Sweet Dolce. Virtue Virtu. "White Bianco. Yellow Giallo. EXAMPLES, father's big lo ho I have your good book. My brother has the white hat. My friend has my sister's beauti- ful horse. Have you the English dictionary ? They have my sister's dress. il gran libro del vostrc buon padre. Miofratello ha il cappello bianco. II mio arnica ha il bel cavallo d% mia sorella. Avete voi il dizionario Inglese? Essi hanno la veste di mia sorella. EXERCISE V. Have you your good father's black coat? I have not his black coat. Are your sisters in my brother's coach ? They have my father's beautiful horses, and they have no need of your brother's coach. You are very kind, sir. Is your dictionary very large? No, sir ; my French and English dictionary is not very large, but my friend's dictionary is very large. Is your sister's dress green or white? My sister's dress is not green. Have you the white gloves with you ? No, sir ; my white gloves are on the bed in my brother's room. Have they not my red slippers? Yes, sir ; they have your red slippers and your yellow shoos. Is my friend's red wine on the table? No, sir; your friend's wine is not sweet, and we have no need of his wine ; we shall have my good friend's white wine. My mother's yellow roses are not fragrant. Are the roses of your garden white or red ? The roses in myfgardcn are red ; but they are not fra- grant. Has not my friend your sister's beautiful picture? My Bister's picture is not very beautiful. VERBS. 27 LESSON VII, VERBS. 48. Italian Yerbs are divided into three classes or conjugations, whicli are known by the termina- tion of the infinitive. 49. Infinitives end in are, ere, ire. N. B. — A few infinitives which do not end in either of these terminations are contractions ; as, Porre, from ponerCy to put ; condurrCy from conducere, to conduct. 50. Infinitives in are belong to the first conjuga- tion ; as, amare^ to love ; cantarej to sing. 51. Infinitives in ere belong to the second conju- gation ; as, joerdere, to lose ; ardere, to burn. 52. Infinitives in ire belong to the third conjuga- tion ; as, partire, to depart ; sentire, to hear. 53. Regular verbs are conjugated by changing the terminations are^ ere, ire, of the infinitive, into the various terminations assigned to each person of all the tenses of each conjugation. [FLECTION OF A REGULAR VERB OF THE FIRST CONJL GATION. AMJRE, TO LOVE. PRESENT, lo amo . . . . Hove. JVbi amiamo . . We love. Tu ami . . . . Thou lovest. Vol amate . . , Ye love. Egli arr.a ... He loves. Essi amano They lovei See pa ge 199. 28 VERBS. 54. The verbs of this conjugation are regular^ except the four following and their compounds: andare, to go ; dare, to give; /are, to do ; stare jto stay. 55. Yerbs ending in care, gare, take an h after the c and g, whenever these consonants are followed by i and e, in order to preserve the hard sound of these letters ; thus, Mancare.) , (manchi^mancherOi') . ^ (manciy mancero. _ > make A ,. , ^ r ^^d not -^ 56. Verbs ending in dare, glare, suppress the i of the root before e and i; thus, Baciare. ") , (baciy bacero, "> , r bacii, baciero. ^makei . . ^ and not J .. . . Manffiare,) {mangiy manger Oy) \mangiiy mangier o. 57. Verbs ending in gliare, cliiare, and ghiare, drop the i only before another i ; thus, Vegliarey Picchiare, Ragghiare, f vegliy veglieroy make I picchi, picchieroy \ and not I ragghiy ragghiero. ■ vegliiy veglerh. picchii, picchero. . ragghiiy ragghero. 58. The past participle joined to the verb avere does not change its termination to agree with the subject, but joined to the verb essere it always agrees with the subject. Mia sorella ha avuio My sister has had. Mia sorella t stata My sister has been. 59. There is in Italian but one present tense which expresses both a present action and the habit of repeating the same action ; as, I am writing, or I write, is expressed by lo scrivo. VERBS. 28 To call . . . Ji\j\jjn.jj That .... Che. Language . . Harmonious . Haughty . . . . . Lingua. . . . Armonioso. . . . Altiero. To-morrow . Domani. To think . . Pensare. Truth . . . Verita. Undoubtedly . IndubitatamenU Voice. . . . Voce. When . . . Quando. Reserved . . To sinsT • • • . . . Riser vato. . . . fln.nlnrp Small . . . To speak . . To study . . , . . Parlare. . . . Studiare. Well .... £e7ie. Why ? because Ferche ? perchL EXAM PLES. Is my sister's voice very harmo- nious ? Where shall you sing to-morrow ? Do you study the French or the English language ? Why do you not speak French ? Because I have not studied much. E la voce di mia sorella violto armoniosa ? Dove canter ete domani ? Studiate la lingua Francese o la lingua Inglese ? Perche non parlate Francese ? Perche non ho studiato molto. EXERCISE VI. Why is your sister so proud? Because she sings very well. When will she sing? To-morrow. Where? At my father's house, undoubtedly. Why? Do you sing? Yes, I sing, and my voice is good ; but I am not proud. Do you call my sister proud because she is reserved ? No, I do not call your sister proud because she is reserved, but because she thinks that her voice is rich and harmonious ; and the truth is that her voice is Qot very harmonious. Have you studied the French language? Not much. Do you speak Italian? No, sir. Is not your room very small ? My room is not very small. Do you study the English language? Yes, sir ; I study the English and French languages. Is my father in the garden? He is in the garden with my sister. My friend's little bird sings very well. Where are my gloves? Your gloves are in my brother's room on his table. Is your brother in his room? No, sir ; he is not in his room, and I have not the key. When will he be at my friend's house ? He will be at your friend's house to-morrow. 30 DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. LESSON VIII DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 60. Demonstrative Adjectives point definitely tc one object, or to several of the same kind. QuestOy this. Ciby this or that thing. ' I that. ' Y same. QuellOy ) MedesimOy ) 61. Questo determines an object near to or named by the person speaking or writing. 62. Cotesto, an object near to the person spoken to. 63. QuellOj an object distant both from the per- son speaking and the person spoken to. Observation, — Quello is used only with nouns commencing with z or impure s, or when it is at the end of the sentence. Before any other consonant it makes quely and before a vowel quell'. Quello specchio That looking-glass, Questo libra o quello This book or that one. Queir amico That friend. Quel libra That book. N. B. — Questo and quello are often used as relative pronouns in the sense of the latter and the former. In this case, questo invariably points to the last-mentioned object ; as, Voi avete il coltellOy ed il temperino ; questo e buonOy quello e catlivo. Here questo has reference to temperinoy and not to coltello. 64. Cid (invariable) is used instead of questa^ quella, or cotesta cosa, this or that thing, or what ; in which case it is always followed by cite; thus^ Cib eke ia scrivoy what I write, means questa casa eke io tcrivo. Cio che tu scrivi, what thou writest, means cotesta cosa che tu scrivi. do che egli scrivCy what he writes, means quella cosa che egli scrivf DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 31 VOCABULARY. Academy Accademia. Industrious Industrioso. Avaricious . . . • Avaro. Carpet Tappeto. Close, narrow . . . Stretto. Coward. Codardo. Day Giorno, Difficult Difficile. To find Trovare. Happy Felice. How Come. Falsehood Mcnzogna. Large . . Largo. Lesson . . Lezione. Morning . Matiina^ mattino. Never . . JVon ; mai.* Song . , Canzone. Time . . Tempo. To-day . Ogyi. Whimsical Capriccioso, bisbetic§ * Non before the verb, and mai after it. Is this your grammar ? Have you studied the lesson ? Shall you sing this song ? Is that pencil your brother's ? I have this book, not that. EXAMPLES. E questa la vostra grammatica ? Avete vol studiato la lezione ? Canterete voi questa canzone ? E quel lapis di vostra fraiello ? lo ho questo libro, non quello. EXERCISE VII. Is this my brother's dictionary ? Your brother does not study Italian. This is not his book. This is my Italian dictionary. Is that man your good father's friend ? My father has never spoken to that man, and he has never been his friend. Do you find your French song difficult ? Yes, sir ; I find the French lan- guage very difficult. When vrill you sing the Italian song? To-morrow. I am poor, but you are avaricious and vrhimsical. Is your carpet narrow or wide ? My carpet is neither narrow nor wide, because I have no carpet. Have you studied your les- son ? I have not studied my lesson, because I have had no time. Shall you sing with my sister to-day ? Not to-day. Why not ? Becau»3 I never sing when she sings. When shall I speak to your father ? To-morrow. Where shall I find my hat ? You will find your hat and your black gloves in my father's room, on the little table. I have no need of my black gloves. Is this your father's piano? Yes, sir ; this piano is my father's. How does your friend speak the French language? He does not speak the French language very well. Shall you sing this or that flong ? I shall sing this song, not that. 32 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. LESSON IX. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 65. Personal Pronouns are words used instead of nouns, and serve to designate an object as belong- ing to the first, second, or third person. They are, lo tu egli ella noi vox eglino elleno esso. I thou he she we you they, m. they,/. he or it which make, in the objective case, Me te lid lei noi voi loro esso me thee him her us you them him or it. 66. Personal pronouns have the objective form in the relations of possession (genitive), attribution (dative), and derivation (ablative). I, lo. He, Eglu She, Ella. Of me, Dime. Of him, Dilui. Of herself. Disc. To me, A me. To him, A lui. To herself, A se. From me, Da me. From him. Da lui. From herself, Da se. 67. To give force to the expression, personal pronouns are often followed by the demonstrative adjectives stesso and medesimo. Jo stesso pai lai a vostro padre ... I myself spoke to your father. Essa medesima mando il libro . . . She herself sent the book. N. B. — No pronoun is prefixed to the word selfy as in English. lo stessoy I self, and not lo mestesso- 68. Se is used only for the third person, and has reference to the subject. Egli parla di se He speaks of himself. Ella non ama che se .... She loves but herself. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 33 69. The pronouns me, te, se, where preceded by the preposition C07i, should be transposed and united with the elision of the n. Thus : Con me "] fmeco. Co7i te > make \ teco. Con se J [seco. N. B. — JVoscOt voscOy instead of co/i noi, con voi, are obsolete. 70. Loro in the dative takes no preposition, if placed before the direct object; as, Date loro questo libro. Give them this book. Loro in the genitive is elegantly placed between the noun and the article without the preposition; as^ n loro libro. Their book, or the book of them. 71. Instead of e??a, Za can be used. La mi vuol bene. She loves me. 72. Egli and ella are often used as expletives in the sense of it. Egli e vero. It is true. Ella e impossibile. It is impossible. N. B. — 7/ , used in English as an expletive, is generally omitted in Italian. E vero. It is true. E impossibile. It is impossible. 73. Esso is moreover used for animate and inani mate objects ; and, with its feminine and~ plurals, is elegantly written dessOj after the verbs esserCj to be, and parere, to seem. Egli e desso. It is he. Mi par dessa. It seems to be she. Eran desse, qual tu sei, sul mattino delV eta. They were, as thou art, in the morning of life. 34 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. VOCABULARY. Acute Acuta. To assure Assicurare Blow Cdlpo. To burn Bruciare. Cloth Panno, To cost Costare. Daughter-in-law . JVuora. Father-in-law . . . Suocero. How much .... Quanta Large Largo Last night .... leri sera. To look Guardare* Mother-in-law . . Suocera, Nose JVaso. Prudent Prudenie. Shrewd Accorto, Silk Seta. Son-in-law .... Genero. Whiteness .... Bianchezza Word Parola. EXAMPLES, 1 have not sung the Italian song, because it is too long. Your book is good for nothing. I have spoken to my brother, not to your friend. 10 non ho cantato la canzone Ita- liana, perche e molto lunga, 11 vostro libro non e buono a nulla, lo ho parlato a mio fratello, non al vostro amico. EXERCISE VIII. When shall you study your lesson ? I shall study my lesson when your sister sings her song. Will she sing the same song ? Yes, she will sing the same song with me. Why do you not eing the Italian song ? Because it is difficult, and my voice is not very harmonious. Will your voice be harmonious when you eing with her? Undoubtedly. Do you speak to my father? I speak to you, not to him. How much does this cloth cost? Not much. Where is your father-in-law ? He is in my broth- er's garden with my good mother-in-law and his friend. Am I not very shrewd ? Why do you think so ? Because I am prudent. I have burnt their books because they were good for nothing Is it possible? Yes, it is possible. Who is with your mother? Her son-in-law is with her. Is that man with the big nose your mother's son-in-law? It is he. Where is my brother? He is in my friend's room. Where is your friend's book? It is in my father's room. Is your father in the room? No, sir ; my father is not in the room ; he is in my brother's garden with your good Bister's friend. My sisters have boon with your friends, and 1 have been in my room with my mother. Has your mother been with you ? She has been, and is always, with me. INDEFINITE ARTICLE. LESSON X. INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 74. The Indefinite Article is uno for the mas- culine, and una for the feminine ; as, Uno specchiOf a looking-glass. Una donna, a woman. 75. Uno drops the o when followed by a conso- nant other than s impure or z, or by a vowel ; as, Un uomo, a man. Un libroy a book. 76. The indefinite article must be repeated with every noun ; as, Un uomOy una donna^ ed un ragazzo. A man, woman, and boy. 77. The indefinite article is omitted : 1. Before the adjectives alcuni, pocJii, a few ; inolti, a great many ; as, , , (pochilibri. ^^ C a few books. Ioho\^ 7.. ,-L . I have -^ ^ , , C molti libri. i a great many books. 2. Before a noun in the predicate after a verb passive or neuter, and before a noun placed in appo- sition with a noun or pronoun, unless it be con- nected with some qualifying word or phrase ; as, Mio fratello e mercante .... My brother is a merchant. Egli e Francese He is a Frenchman. Mio fratello i un ricco mercante My brother is a rich merchant. 3. After the adjective, qualifying a noun, which follows the words cosi, so or as ; troppo, too ; as, Cost grand* uomo So great a man. Troppo pericolosa spccolazione . Too dangerous a speculation. 36 INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 4. After che^ or anj other word expressing ad miration or surprise ; as, Che bel cavallo ! What a beautiful horse ! Qual matto ! What a fool ! 78. The indefinite article precedes the word talt^ such ; as, Un tal malto Such a fool. Un tal cavallo Such a horse. 79. The definite article is used instead of the English indefinite article before nouns of measure and weight : Due dollari la libbra .... Two dollars a pound. Tre scellini la botliglia . . . Three shillings a bottle. 80. TJno is often used without a noun, and is sometimes suppressed. Egli e uno che calunnia tuiti He is a man who slanders everj indistintamente. body indiscriminately. £ffli e uomo di cattivafama. He is a man of bad reputation. PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 81. The partitive article is expressed in Italian by the preposition di and the definite article : lo ho del pane, delV inchiostro, dello 1 have bread, ink, sugar, paper, zuccherOf della carta, del libri. and books. 82. The partitive article is omitted in a negative sentence, or when wo wish to make prominent the object and not its quantity : Jlvete del pane ? Have you any bread ? lo non ho pane I have no bread. lo ho vino ed acqua .... I have wine and water. INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 37 VOCABULARY. To ask ... . Domandare. Long .... Lunyo. Beneficent . . . Beneficente. Modesty . . . Modestia. Bitter. . . . . Ainaro. Mouth .... Bocca, To commence . Cominciare. Night . . . . JVotte. Conduct . . . . Condotta. Odd mistake . Sproposito. To confess . . . Confessare. On the contrary AL contrario. Gentle . . . . Gentile. To praise . . . Lodare. Hammer . . . Martello. Short .... Corto. To hope . . . . Sperare. Subject. . . . Suddilo. Indispensable . Indispensabile. Then .... Alloroy dunque EXAMPLES. Have you any friends ? I have no friends. Is she not a very beautiful woman ? When did you speak to my sister ? Avetc vol degli amici ? lo non ho amici. JVon e ella una donna molio bella, Quando parlasie a mia sorella ? EXERCISE IX. Is not this a beautiful book ? Why do you call this a beau- tiful book? Because it is a very easy book. On the contrary, this book is not very easy. What a beautiful picture ! Has your friend any good books ? Yes, sir ; he has a few good books. Hovp- many ? Not a great many. Have your brothers any birds ? My brothers have some very beautiful birds, but they do not sing. When vt^ill you begin your French lesson? To-morrovr. Shall you begin your lesson vv^ith my sister ? Your sister has studied the French language with my friend. With your friend ! where is he? Is he not a good man ? I ask where he is. He is in my brother's room. Do they study their English lesson ? They do not study their English lesson ; they sing an Italian song. Have you any good pens ? I have a great many pens, but they are not very good. Where shall I study my lesson ? In your room. It is not very easy (di) to study my lesson in my room. Why? Because my brother, his friend, and his friend's ugly sister, are studying their French lesson in my room. Why do you call your friend's sister ugly? Because she has a very short nose, and a very big mouth. Is she rich? Yes, she is very rich. Then she is not ugly ; on the contrary, she is beau- tiful. What an odd mistake ! 38 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. LESSON XI FORMATION OF THE PLURAL, continued. 83. Nouns ending in ca and ga require an h in the plural to preserve the hard sound of the singu- lar; as, Duca, monarca, piaga, make duchi, monarchi, piaghe. 84. Nouns ending in cia and gia tshange ia into e, if this termination is a diphthong ; as, Bilancia., spiaggia, make bilance, spiagge. N. B. — i Camiciay shirt, makes camicie in the plural, to distin- guish it from the singular, camicey a priest's vestment. 85. If the termination of the cia and gia is not a diphthong, the general rule is applied ; as, Regia, bugioy make regie y bugie. 86. Some nouns are used only in tlie singular ; as, Schiatta, race ; genie, descendants ; progcnie, progeny ; Mane, morning ; prole, offspring ; stir pe, "stock ; cento, hundred. Others are used only in the plural ; as, Esequie, funeral obsequies : nozze, marriage ; vanni, wings. Sponsali, nuptial rites ; forbid, scissors ; pantaloni, pantaloons. 87. Proper names of persons are, by antonomasia^ used only in the plural ; as, Gli Alessandri ; gli Annibali. 88. Names of metals in the plural express objects made of the same metals ; as, n fe'^ro, iron ; I ferri, iron tools. FORMATION OP THE PLURAL. 39 89. Names of virtues in the plural express tLe practice of them ; as, i' elemosina, the virtue of almsgiving. Le elemosiney practical almsgiving. 90. To proper names another name or a quality IS added when they might be confounded with others of the same family; as, Errico primogenito. Errico cadeito. Pieiro padre. Pietro jiglio. 91. Proper names of distinguished families are often used in the plural ; as, I Medici. I Leniuli. I Fabbii. I Pisoni. MONTHS. Gennajo . January. Luglio . . July. Febbrajo . February. Agosto . . August. Marzo . . March. Settemhre . September. Aprile . . April. Oitohre . . . October. Maggio . . May. Novemhre . November. Giugno . . June. Dicemhre . . December. DA YS. Lunedi . . Monday. Giovedi . . Thursday. Martedt . . Tuesday. Venerdi . . Friday. Mercoledt . Wednesday. Sahato . . . Saturday. Domenica . Sunday. SEASONS. Primavera . Spring. l Autunno . Autumn. Esta . . . Summer. Invemo . . Winter. 40 ■ FORMATION OP THE PLURAL. VOCABULARY. Bean Fava. Button Bottone. Companion .... Compagno. Convent Convento. Courage Coraggio. Egyptian Egiziano. Family Famiglia. Fruit Frutto. History Jstoria. Illustrious .... Illustre. Lentil Lente. Name JVbme. Nature JVaiura. Origin Origine, Pea Pisella. Project Progetto. Slave Schiavo. Success Successo. Tree Albero. Vegetable .... Legume. EXAMPLES. Have you brought my shirts ? Aveie vol portalo le mie camicie ? Have you my scissors ? Avete voi le mie forbid ? I have neither scissors nor knives. lo non ho ne forbid, nl coltelU. Have you the name of this vege- Avete voi il nome di questo Ic table ? gume? Have you any lentils ? Avete delle lenti ? EXERCISE X. Where is your brother ? My brother is with my sister. Are not your sisters in the convent ? No, they are not in the con- vent ; they are not nuns. Where are your tools ? In my broth- er's room, on the chair. The Roman soldiers were husbandmen ; the fruits and vegetables which they had in their gardens are the origin of the names of some illustrious families : the LeniuU, from lentils ; the Fabbii, from beans ; and the Pisons, from peas. The wives are the companions, and not the slaves, of their husbands. Llie stars and the oxen were among the gods of the Egyptians. The sleeves of my coat are very short. Have you the scissors? I have the buttons of my pantaloons. Where are your daugh- ters? They are in their rooms. Are your brothers in their stores? Yes, sir ; they are in their stores. Have they many books? No, sir; they have not many books, but they have a great many pictures. Have they a great many beautiful pic- tures ? They have many pictures, but they are not very fine. Where are your shirts? They are in my sister's room. I have a great many trees in my garden. Have you many books in your room ? I have a few books, but they are good. IRREGULAR VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION. 41 LESSON XII. IRREGULAR VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION AJSTDARE, TO GO. DARE, TO GIVE. PRESENT. Vado or vo ... I go. Vat Thou goest. Va He goes. Andiamo .... We go. Andate You go. Vanno They go. Do I give. Dai Thou givest Da He gives. Diamo We give. Date You give. Danno They give. N. B. — For the remaining tenses, see page 201. 92. The verb andare requires the preposition a^ when followed by an infinitive, or when it expresses going to some place ; as, Vado a parlare. I am going to speak. Vado al mercato. I am going to market. If we speak of going to any person's house, da is used; as, Vado dal medico. I am going to the physician's. Andro da mio fratello. I shall go to my brother's. 93. The following nouns require the preposition di after them when used before an infinitive ; as, Coraggio Courage. Desiderio Desire. Voglia Wish. Ragione Right. Paura . Fear. Vergogna Shame. Tempo Time. Torto Wrong. 94. The adverbs jprimaj before, and dopo, after^ are followed by the preposition dij and take the infinitive instead of the gerund* as in English; as, Dopo di aver parlato. After having spoken. Prima di andare. Before going. * The gerund in Italian corresponds to the present participle in English 3 IRREGULAR VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION. VOCABULARY. Agreeable . Always . . Coming . . Company . Compliment Custom . . Evening . To fix. . . To learn . Memory . . Aggradevole. . Sempre. Venturo. . Compagnia. . Complimento. . Costume. . Sera. . Fissure. . Im par are. . Memoria. Morning Neighbor Other . . Pleasure To present Probably Reward . Visit . . Week . . Yesterday . Mattina. . Prossimo. . Mtro. . Piacere. . Presentare. . Probabilmenie. . Ricompenza. . Visita. . Settimana. . leri EXAMPLES. Spero di andare con vol. Avete voi dei buoni libri ? lo ho del libri molto buoni. many Egli non ha mai avuto mt Ux amici. I hope to go with you. Have you any good books ? I have very good books. He has never had a great many friends. EXERCISE XI. When shall I have the pleasure of your company ? My com pany is not very agreeable ; but I shall go to spend an evening with your brother-in-law next week, and then I hope to present my compliments to you and to your dear mother Have you fixed the day? No, I have not fixed the day ; but I hope to be with my friend to-morrow morning. He will probably go with me to visit a few friends, and I think that we shall be at your brother's house next Tuesday. Did your friends speak of me to- day? They spoke of you, but not much. Have your brothers commenced their French lesson ? They commenced their French lesson yesterday, but they did not study much. Shall you go in my carriage? I shall go to my friend's garden. My father has not a very good horse. On the contrary, I think that your father has always had some very good horses. Have you any good books ? Yes, sir ; I have some very good books. Where are they? They are on the little table in my mother's room. Have you studied your lesson ? I have studied my French les- son, but I have not sung my Italian song. Have you not a good memory ? I have a good memory, but my voice is not very good. When shall you go to your father's ? To-morrow. CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 43 LESSON XIII. CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 95. \yHEN the personal pronouns are governed by a verb, and employed in the dative and accusa- tive, they take a new form. Instead of the dative and accusative, A me . to me . . mi . is us Me . . . me . . mi , A noi . to us . . . ci or ne " Noi . . . us . ci or ne " Ate. . . to thee . ti, . , '' Te . . . thee . . ti. . A vol . to you . vi Vol . . you . . vi AM . to him . gli . Lui . . . him . . lo or il AM . to her . . le. . Lei . . her . , la. . A loro . to them . loro . Loro . them . . . lim.,lef. A se . . . to oncsel f . si . . Se . . oneself . si . . 96. These pronouns, thus used, are called con junctive; as, lo gli parlai. I spoke to him. Literally : I to him spoke. lo Z' amo. I love her. Literally : I her love. 97. Conjunctive pronouns follow or precede the verb. They follow the verb, and, with the exception of loro, are united to it : 44 CONJUNCTIVE PEONOUNS. 1. In the affirmative imperative, except the third person; as, Scrivimi e spera Write to me, and hope. Scriveteci e sperate Write to us, and hope. 2. In the gerund, affirmatively ; as, Scrivendoglii diro la verita. Writing to him, I will tell the truth. 3. In the affirmative infinitive, which loses the final e ; as, Vederla^ parlarle, e morire. To see her, to speak to her, and to die. 98. In all other tenses, and in the third person of the affirmative imperative, the conjunctive pronoun precedes ; as, Ci scriva se vuole. Let him write to us if he wishes. N. B. — In the imperative, gerund, and infinitive, used negatively, the conjunctive pronoun is placed between the negation and the verb ; as, JVon ci scriva e fara molto Not to us let him write, and he will meglio. do much better. JVon gli scrivendo lo faro Not to him in writing, him I will disperare. make despair. JVon le scrivere e crudelta. Not to her to write is cruelty. 99. Conjunctive pronouns, gli excepted, double their first letter when affixed to a verb of one sylla- ble, or to a verb ending with an accented vowel, in which case the accent is omitted ; as, Fammi guesto favor e^ instead of /a mi. Dirogli di venirCy instead of diro gli. 100. The pronoun it should be expressed by *7, Zo, l\ when referring to a masculine noun; and by la, l\ when referring to a feminine noun ; as, Lo faro con piacere. I will do it with pleasure. 101. The pronoun them is expressed by li (somd- times by gli)j m., and le, f. ; as, lo li avro domani. I shall have them to-morrow. CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. VOCABULARY. To abuse . . . To bring, carry To buy .... Color .... Dress-maker . To forget . . . Gold To leave . . . Misfortune . . Necessity . . . Abusare. For tare. Comprare. Colore. Sarta. Dimenticare. Oro. Lasciare. Disgrazia. JVecessita. New JVuovo. Old Vecchio. Opinion Opinione. Poverty Poveria. Prosperity .... Prosper ita. Ready Pronto. Reason Ragione, Ruin Rovina. Shoemaker .... Calzolaio. Tailor Sarto EXAISIPLES. Are you going to the tailor's? Andate dal sarto? No, I am going to my store. Your dress has a good color. Good books or not. JVb, io vadj alia mia boltega. La vostra veste ha un buon colore Buoni libri, o no. EXERCISE XII. Has the shoemaker brought my boots ? No, sir ; I went to his store yesterday, and they were not ready. When will he bring them ? He will bring them to-morrow. Why does he not bring them to-day? Because they will not be ready to-day. Give me my gloves. Where are they? I left them in your brother's room. Shall you not speak to my father ? I shall speak to him, undoubtedly. Shall you not speak to his sister ? No, sir ; I shall not speak to her. Why not ? I shall not speak to her to- day because she did not speak to me yesterday. This is not a good reason. Good reason or not, I shall not speak to her to- day. I will buy this beautiful horse for my sister. Why do you not buy it for yourself? Because I have no need of a small horse. The dress-maker brought me a white dress ; it is too large for me, and I shall give it to my mother. Give him tha", inkstand, and I will give you this penknife. Have you studied your lesson ? Yes, sir ; my lesson was not very difficult to-day. When your lesson is not very difficult, it is very easy to study it. Bring me my old black coat. Shall you give it to your friend? No, I shall not give it to my friend to-day, because the tailor has not brought my new coat. AYill he bring it to-morrow ? To-morrow is Sunday. Is it not Friday to-day ? No, sir. 46 IRREGULAR VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION. LESSON XIV. IRREGULAR VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION FAREy TO MAKE. STARE, TO STAY PRESEKT. Fo or faccio . . I make. Fai Thou makest. Fa He makes. Facciamo .... We make. Fate You make. Fanno They make. Sto I stay. Stai Thou stayest Sta He stays. Stiamo We stay. State You stay. Stanno They stay. (See page 201.) N. B. — The verb /are is derived from the Latin /acere, and should properly belong to the irregular verbs of the second conjugation. 102. The verb fare is idiomatically employed in expressions denoting the state of the weather ; as, Che tempo fa ogyi ? How is the weather to-day ? N. B. — The verb /are, thus employed, must precede the noun, except in an interrogative sentence. Fa hel tempo oggi. It is fine weather to-day. Not II tempo fa bello oggi. 103. The verb stare is idiomatically used in expressions concerning one's health ; as, Come state, signora ? How do you do, madam ? 104. The following nouns require the verb to have, and not to be, as in English : Torto .... Wrong. Paura . . . Fear. Fame .... Hunger. Sete .... Thirst. Rag-'one . . . Right. Vergogna . . Shame. / am hungry, is expressed by lo ho fame, I have hunger. IRREGULAR VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION. 47 VOCABULARY. To accompany . Accompagnare. Civility .... Civilta. Cold Freddo. Dear Caro. To deserve . . Meritare. To embrace . . Abbracciare, Fear Ti/nore. House .... Casa. Ingratitude . . Ingratiludine. Kino: Re. Money . . . To pass, spend Past .... To reproach . To sepax'ate . Soon . . . To spai'kle To thank . . Temperance . "Warm . . . Denaro, Passare. Passato. Rimpr over art Separare. Presto. Sciniillare. Ringraziare. Te/nperanza. Caldo. EXAMPLES. Are you thirsty or hungry? Avetefame o sete ? I am neither thirsty nor hungry. JVon ho nefame ne sete. How are your brothers? Come stanno i vostrifraielli ? EXERCISE XIII. Good-morning, sir ; how do you do ? I am very well, I thank you. How is your sister? My sister is not very well. Where did you spend the day yesterday? I was with my friend. Give me some water. Are you thirsty? Yes, I am thirsty and hun- gry. Am I not right in reproaching him for his ingratitude ? What has he done ? He has not spoken to my mother. You are right ; he is proud, and he deserves it. How is the weather to-day? It is very fine weather. Was it fine weather yester- day? Yesterday the weather was very beautiful. Have you time to study your French lesson ? I have time, but I have no desire to study it. Has your brother a desire to buy my car- riage ? He has a great desire to buy it, but he has no money. When will he have money ? He will probably have some money next month. Then I will give him my horse now, if he will give me the money next month. Is it cold to-day? No, sir ; it is not very cold. Was it warm yesterday ? Yes, sir ; it was very warm yesterday. Are you afraid to go with me ? Where shall we go? We will go to the shoemaker's. Has he not brought your boots? He has brought neither the boots nor the shoes. Let us go, then ; I am not afraid to go with you ; I was only desirous to speak with your sister before going. She is not at home. When Vill she be at home ? She will be at home soon. 48 USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, LESSON XV. USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 105. The Definite Article is used before noung taken in the full extent of their signification. It is thus used before nouns designating, 1st, A class. 2d, A species of a class. 3d, An individual of a species, 1. Gli uomini sono mortali. Men are mortal. Here the word uomini is used to represent a class, in its whole extent ; i. e., all men. N. B. — Instead of gli uomini^ Vuomo can be used, because a singular noun may often' be used as a representative of the whole class, 2. Gli uomini virtuosi sonofelici. Virtuous men are happy. Here uomini virtuosi represents a species, or a number of men who have the quality of virtuosi. We can also say, I'uomo virtuoso, because a singular noun may represent the whole species. 3. i' uo7no di cui vi parlo. The man of whom I speak to you. Here the noun uomo is taken individually, and the article serves to limit it to a single individual whom we wish to particularize. Observation. — Whenever a noun is used in an indefinite manner, 1. €., when we do not wish to consider it as a whole class, as a whole species, or as a particular individual, the article may be omitted. Thus, we may say, Amore, a odio ci guida or L'amore o Vodio ci guida. But, in the first case, amore and odio are used in a general or indefi- nite sense ; while, in the second case, they are limited or determined by Bome circumstances which are understood, such as Vam-ore {che por- iiamo at buoni), V odio (che scntiamo pei cattivi.) Dante says : Risposemi : non uomOy uomo gia fui. He replied to me : I am not a man, man once I was. Here the poet wishes only to give the indefinite idea of which uomo is the sign. Uomo is here used somewhat like a qualifying adjective* 106. Abstract nouns, used alone, take the definite article ; as, la virju, virtue. But, when two or more nouns are joined together, the article may bo omitted-, as, virtii ed onorXj virtue and honor. USE OF IIIE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 4i> 107. Before names of countries, kingdoms, and provinces, the article may be used or omitted. If we wish to mention the whole country or the province, we must use the article ; as. La Italia e una bella contrada. Italy is a beautiful country. But, if we view the country in a general manner, or as a point, without reference to its extent, then the article is not necessary ; as, Veil go da Italia. I come from Italy. 108. The article is also used before names of the mountains celebrated by the poets, and before the words Signore, Signora, Signorina; as, iZ Pindo, il Parnasso, U Elicona. Pindus, Parnassus, Helicon. n Signor Giovanni^ La Signora C. Mr. John, Mrs. C. 109. The article is omitted in a direct address ; as, UomOy tu set mortale. Man, thou art mortal. Italiay tu cui die la sorte . . Italy, thou to whom fate has given . . Signor B.^ dove e la Signora C. ? Mr. B., where is Mrs. C. ? 110. Yerbs, adverbs, and adjectives, used sub- stantively, take the article ; as, n leggere . The reading. I II perche . . The why. n buono . . The good one. I II rosso . . The red one. 111. The article is used before nouns expressing titles, which are followed by the proper name of the person, or family. The word papa is excepted ; as, n Re Giorgio. King George. Papa Sisto. Pope Sixtus. n Generate Washington. General Washington. 112. Family names of persons generally known are preceded by the article ; as, il Tasso, il Hilton. N. B. — Say VAlighieri, but not il Dante, because Dante is thf proper name, and not the family name, of the great Italian poet 60 USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. VOCABULAKY. Alps Alpi. Bad Cattivo. To corrupt . , . Corrompere. Death Morte. Discord .... Discordia. Element .... Elemento. Europe Europa. France Fraiicia. Health Salute, Interest .... Inter esse. Invention .... Invenzione. Italy Italia. Justice Giustizia. Masterpiece . . . Capo lavoro. Merit Merits. Mortal Mortale. Paris Parigi. To show .... Mostrare. To wait for . . . Aspettare. Wicked Malvaggio. Woman .... Donna. To reveal .... Rivelare. EXAMPLES. It is for our interest to preserve E pel nostra interesse il preser- our health. vare la nostra salute. That invention cost him much. Quella invenzione gli costo molto EXERCISE XIV. Man is mortal. Man, thou art mortal. Tyrants are the scourge of humanity. Tyrants, you are the scourge of human- ity. Death makes kings and subjects equal. Falsehood is odious in itself. Prosperity and success are not alv^^ays the reward of an industrious man. Evil companions corrupt good manners. Bread and water are indispensable to man. Is not man the masterpiece of nature ? Fear and selfishness make men wicked. True merit is always accompanied by civility and mod- esty. Black and white are not colors. History is the picture of times and men. Necessity is the mother of invention, and health is the daughter of exercise and temperance. Discord is the ruin of states. Justice embraces many virtues. Where is Madam, Mr. John ? She is in her room. Has she given my book to your father ? Yes, she gave the book to my father last night. The Alps separate Italy from France. My brother is in Italy, and my son will go to Paris next week. General Warren is a name dear to the Americans. Italy is the garden of Europe. How is your mother to-day ? She is not very well. Is she in her room? No, she is in the garden. Have you many flowers in your garden ? We have very few flowers in summer- time, but in the spring we have a great many flowers and birds. Poverty and misfortune reveal true friends. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 61 LESSON XVI RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 113. Relative Pronouns are always expressed in Italian. They are Quale, che . . . . . who, -which, what. Chi who. 114. Quale and c7ie are used for persons and things. 115. Quahj plural quali, is always preceded by the definite article, which determines its gender; as, H libro, il quale The book which. La donna, la quale The woman who. I libri, i quali The books which. Le donne, le quali The women who. 116. C7ie takes no article, and is invariable in the nominative ; in the objective and after prepositions it is changed into cui ; as, L^uomo che persevera riesce . . The man who perseveres succeeds. La donna cui voi amate .... The woman whom you love. L^uomo a cui scrivete .... The man to whom you write. La donna di cui parlate . . . The woman of whom you speak. 117. H che, or, more elegantly, loccJie, has refer- ence to the whole preceding sentence ; as, Mia madre e ammalaia ; locche mi afiige. My mother is sick ; (a thing) which afflicts me. 118. Cui is often used without the preposition; and in the genitive it precedes the noun ; as, L*uomo, cui voi parlate The man to whom you speak Una donna la cui bellezza e estrema . A woman of extreme beauty 52 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Observation. — Instead of cui and quahy onde is often used in poetry ; as, Quella virtude onde mi sento acceso. That virtue by which I feel myself inflamed. 119. Chi is often used alone, referring to some noun understood ; as, Jie wJio, or the man who ; as, Chi persevera riesce. He who perseveres succeeds. 120. ISfe is also classed among the relative pro- nouns, and stands for some of it, or for With, about, of,) , . , .^ ^. ^ „ , >- him, her, it, them. For, from, by, ) This pronoun must always be expressed in Italian, even in cases where it is understood in English ; as, J^'e parlai a mio fraiello . I spoke to my brother about it. Avete del denaro ? . . . . Have you any money ? JVe ho I have (some of it). Ne is always placed before the verb ; as, lo ne ho. I have some of it. 121. In order to, in Italian, is expressed by^er^ which is never understood, as in English ; as, Vado al mercato per comprare della came. I am going to market to buy some meat. EXAMPLES. Where are you going ? Dove andate ? I am going to buy some bread. VUdo a comprare del pane. Has he any good books ? Ha egli dei buoni libri ? He has some good ones. Effli ne ha dei buoni. Whose books are these? Di chi sono questi libri? They are my brother's. Sono di miofratello. The merchant has money. E mercante ha denaro The painter is generous. 7Z pittore e gcneroso. How is the weather to-day ? Che tempo fa oggi ? We have bad weather to-day, Jibbiamo cattivo tempo oggt. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 53 VOCABULARY. To admire .... Ammirare. Beauty Bellezza. To change .... Cambiare. Evil Male. Generous Generoso. Ilat Cappcllo. Ignorant Jgnorante. To languish .... Ltinguire. Learned . . . Dotto, To lend Prestare. Market Mercato. Merchant Often . Painter Perhaps Physician Poor . . To pronounce Pronunciation To send . . Teacher . . Thought . Mercante. Spesso. Pittore. Forse. Medico. Povero. Pronunziare. Pronunzia. Mandare. Maestro. Pensiero. EXERCISE XV. What do you think of my horse? I think that your horse is very good. Where are you going? I am going to market. What are you going to buy ? I am going to buy some butter Did you not buy your butter yesterday ? The butter (which) I bought yesterday was not good, and I am going to market (in order) to change it. The painter has no time to commence my picture. Give him some money, and he will begin it soon. Then it is the money, and not the time, that he has not. Per- haps he has no time, but I am sure that he has no money. How does your brother pronounce the French language ? He has not a very good pronunciation. Why not ? Because it is very dif- ficult to pronounce well without a French teacher. You are right. Have you any good books? I have some, but I have not a good French grammar. Why do you not buy one (of them) ? Because I have no money. What did you do with the money (that) I lent you yesterday? I bought a black hat. Why did you not buy a grammar ? Do not reproach me for my ignorance. Are you a merchant, sir? No, sir ; I am a physi- cian. How is the weather to-day? We have fine weather to- day, sir. Is it cold? No, sir. Is it warm ? It is neither cold nor warm. Shall we go to my friend's garden ? Yes ; but I am hungry. Shall I give you some bread and butter ? No. I thank you ; I have some in my room. Then I shall give my bread to the man who is in the garden. Is he poor? He is not poor, but he is not proud. Is not his brother the man to whom I spoke yesterday in your father's garden ? He has no brothers 54 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. LESSON XVII. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 122. The Demonstrative Pronouns are used sub stantively for persons. They are, QuesH This man. Costei This woman. Costoro These men or women. Cotesti, quegli That man. Cotesteiy colei That woman, Cotestoro, coloro Those men or women. Questi makes, in the objective, costuk Cotesti makes, in the objective, cotestui, Quegli makes, in the objective, colui. The other pronouns are invariable. r Cosfui, cotestui, colui ; m., sing. Diy a, da, < Costei, cotesteiy colei ; f., ** C Costoro, cotestoro, coloro ; plural. 123. Demonstrative pronouns in the genitive can elegantly precede the noun without the prepo- sition. Per la costui bonta Per la bonta di costui , j- Through his goodness. 124. Questi points to the person near to the speaker. 125. Cotesti points to the person near to the one spoken to. 126. Quegli points to a person equally distant from the speaker and the person spoken to. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 55 INFLECTION OF A REGULAR VERB OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. CREDERE, TO BELIEVE. PEESENT. Crediamo , . Credete . . . Credono . . Credo .... I believe. Crediamo . . . We believe. Credi .... Thou believest. Credete .... You believe. Crede .... He believes. Credono ... They believe. See page 199. Observation. — Some of the verbs of this conjugation are accentea on the last vowel but one ; as, temere, to fear : others, on the last but two ; as, credere. N. B. — For the few verbs in which the accent falls on the last vowel but one, see page 218. 127. What is the matter , i& expressed by che and the verb- avere ; as, What is the matter with you ? Che avete ? Literally: What have you ? Nothing is the matter with me. JVbn ho nulla. I have nothing. N. B. — Remember that questiy cotesHy quelli, joined to nouns, are the plurals of the adjectives questo, cotesto, quello. EXAMPLES. Are you right in reproaching me for my bad translation ? I have never spoken to that man. Where did you find the books ? I found them on the table. Why did you not bring the white dress with you? Do not cry so loud. I had the pleasure of enjoying your brother's company last night and this morning. This fish is not good. Of what country are you, sir ? .dvete ragione di rimproverarmi per la mia cattiva traduzione ? JVon ho mat parlato a quelV uomo. Dove irovaste voi i libri ? lo li trovai sulla tavola. Perche non portaste la veste bi- anca con voi ? JVbn gridate si forte, lo ebbi il piacere di godere la compagnia di vostro fratello ieri sera e sta mane. Questo pesce non e buono. Di qual paese siete voi, signore f 56 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. VOCABULARY. To assist Assistere. Bear Orso. To cry Gridare. To dine Franz are Example Esempio. Expense Spesa. Eire Fuoco. If Se. Moment Momento. Obstinate . . . Ostinato. Possible .... Possibile. To prove, try . . Provare. To receive . . . Ricevere. Snow JVeve. So, thus .... Cost or su Strong, loud . . Forte. Translation . . Traduzione. Yet Ancora,pure. Negligence .... JVeyligcnza. To yield .... Cedere. EXERCISE XVI. Have you received any money this week ? Yes ; I have received some from my father. I hope (that) you will assist me in my French translation. If it is difficult, I will assist you. I think that my French translation is very difficult to-day. V^aa it difficult yesterday ? Yes, sir ; I found it very difficult. Is this the physician of whom your father spoke to me last week ? No, sir ; my father has never spoken to him. Have you found your gloves ? Yes, sir ; I have found my gloves. Where did you find them? In my friend's store. Is it possible? — you have not been to your friend's store to-day. I have not been to his store to-day, but I was at his house ; and when he found the gloves in his room, he was sure that they were my gloves, and carried them to his store. Am I not right in reproaching you for your carelessness ? Yes, sir ; you are right. Have you any good books ? I have some, but I have not a good French gram- mar. Have you dined? No, sir ; I am going to dine with my brother. Have you tried the red wine I sent him last month ? No, sir ; I have not yet tried it. Give me the book which I lent to your brother. I thought that the book was my brother's, and I lent it to my friend's sister. Why does my mother cry so loud ? Because the dress-maker did not bring her the black dress. Is the dress-maker with her ? She is not with her ; she sent the white dress, but the black dress will not be ready before Saturday. It is time to go to my friend's store. I will go with you, if you wait a moment. I will wait with pleasure. Why is your sister so obstinate ? She is always obstinate ; she thinks that I am always wrong, and she never yields to my wishes. OMISSION OP THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 57 LESSON XVIII OMISSION OP THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 128. The Definite Article is omitted : 1. Before names of kindred preceded by the proper name of the person ; as, Guglielmo, figlio di Giovanni. William, the son of John. 2. Before ordinal numbers which follow proper names of monarchs and popes, or any noun ; as, Gregorio Settimo Gregory the Seventh. Errico Quarto Henry the Fourth. Libra Secondo Book the Second. 3. Before such names as casaj house ; hottegaj store ; cucina, kitchen, when we speak of our own house, store, kitchen j as, JEgli e in cucina . . . He is in the kitchen. lo saro in casa subito . I shall be at home soon. INTERJECTIONS. 129. The following are the principal interjections: Ahimel Alas! Bravo I Bravo I Ah! Ah I Ola! Ho, there I AUoI Stop! Piano ! Softly ! AM lasso I Poor me ! Vergogna ! Shame ! Dehl Ah, pray ! Viva ! Huzza ! hurra ! Ebbene I Well! Zitto! Hush! 130. Lasso agrees in gender and number with the person or persons speaking ; as. Lasso me ! Poor me ! Aid lassi ! Poor ua 58 CONJUNCTIONS. CONJUNCTIONS. Dopo che, After that, Subiio che, ) . ' y As soon as. Toslo die, :■} Pure, Yet. Gia, Already. Non che. Not that. Prima che, Before that. 131. Pure is employed in the sense of yet^ alsOf or even ; as, Son poverOy pure sonfelice. I am poor, yet I am happy. JVon e solo bellay e pure amabile. She is not only beautiful, but also lovely. JUi contentassi pure di uno sguardo. I should be contented even with a look. 132. Pure and gid are often used as expletive words; as, Fate pure cio che vi place . . Do what you like. Abra gia che io voglia lodarvi . Not that I wish to praise you. 133. Non che is sometimes used elliptically for not only hut ; as, Essa merita stima non che rispetto. She deserves not only esteem, but respect 134. The verb following prima che, dopo che, eubito che, tosto che, is used in the future as in English, when futurity is implied ; as, Gli parlero subito che mi scriverete. I will speak to him as soon as you write to me. EXAMPLES. Shall we have any books to-day ? Avremo dci libri oggi 1 I have had no books, and I shall Io non ho avuto libriy e ion ne have none. avru. He is in town, not in the country, Egli e in ciilay non in campagna. Where are you going to-morrow 7 Dove andrete domani f ARTICLE. — INTERJECTIONS. — CONJUNCTIONS. 59 VOCABULARY. Ball .... Ballo. City .... Citta. To conciliate Conciliare. Country . . Campagnay paese. Curiosity . . Curiosita. Deaf .... Sordo. Error, mistake Errore, shaglio. Table . . . Tavola. Faithful . . Fedele. Fish .... Pesce. John . . . Lame . . Now . . . Only. . . Persevering Punishment Reward . Romance . Studious . William . Giovanni. Zoppo. AdessOy ora. Solamenie. Ferseveranie. Pena. Ricompensa. Romanzo. Studioso. Guglielmo. EXERCISE XVIL Where is your father ? He is at home. What is he doing ? He is doing nothing. Why does he not go to the country? Because his horse is lame. Have you studied your lesson? No, sir ; I have had no time. What have you been doing ? Nothing. Shame ! I have studied not only the French lesson, but the Ital- ian translation. Who gave you this book ? John, the son of my friend. Is he in town? No, he vrent into the country last night. Are you ashamed to speak ? I am not ashamed, but I am afraid. Afraid of what ? Afraid of making mistakes. If you are afraid of making mistakes, you will never speak. Where are you going to-night? I am going to the ball. At what time shall you go ? As soon as you go to your father's. My friend has no money, yet he has a good heart. Who gave you this pencil ? William. William, the son of my friend ? No ; William, the brother of your friend. Alas ! What is the matter with you ? I have not studied my lesson. Why do you not study it now ? Because I have no time. Not that you have no time, but you have not the wish to study. I am not only stu- dious, but persevering. Are you thirsty ? No, I am not thirsty. Are you deaf? No, I am not deaf. Have you any books ? Yes, I have some. Are they good books? Some of them are good. Why do you not lend me some romances ? Because I have no romances. Are you afraid to lend me books ? I am not afraid • I have no reason to be afraid. You are a good friend, and you are right. When shall I have the pleasure of enjoying youi company? The pleasure is mine, sir ; and I shall come to-night. 60 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. LESSON XIX NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 135. Numeral Adjectives, or adjectives which express number Uno , . Due . Tre . Quattro Cinque Sette . . Otto , . Nove Died . Undid . Dodid . Tredid . Quaitordid Quindid Sedid . Didassette Didoito Vidannove Venti . Ventuno are the following : . One. . Two. Three. . Four. . Five. . Six. Seven. Eight. . Nine. . Ten. Eleven. Twelve. Thirteen. Fourteen. Fifteen. Sixteen. Seventeen. Eighteen. Nineteen. . Twenty. Twenty-one. as Twenty- two. . Thirty. Thirty-one. Thirty-two. Forty. . Fifty. Sixty. Seventy. Eighty. Ninety. One hundred. I Two hundred. Ventidue Trenta . Trentuno Trentadue Quaranta Ginquanta Sessanta Settanta Ottanta . Novanta Cento . Duecentoov' Dugento Trecento . Three hundred. Mille . . One thousand. Due mila . Two thousand. Died mila . Ten thousand. Un milione . One million. Due milioni . Two millions. Un hilione . One billion, Due bilioni . Two bilHons. Cento has no plural ; Tre cento toldati. Three hundred soldiers. Mille makes in the plural mila ; as, Quattro mila soldati. Four thousand soldiers. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 61 136. Cardinal numbers are invariable, except uno, which makes una for the feminine. 137. Uho drops the o before a masculine noun commencing with a vowel, or with a consonant which is not z or impure s ; as, Un libro, un uomo, uno spirito, U7ia donna, uii* aniico, w?i' arnica. N. B. — Uno and una suffer no elision at the end of a phrase. 138. The noun which follows ventuno, trentuno, should, for euphony, be in the singular ; as, Venlun' anno, trentun libro, quarantunu lettera. N. B. — This rule is not to be observed if the noun precedes or when the number is preceded by the article ; as, Anni ventuno ; libri trentuno ; i trentuno libri ; le ventuna lettere. 139. The preposition on is not expressed in Ital- ian, before the date of the month ,* as, E quindici di Luglio On the fifteenth of July. Quanti ne abbiamo del mese ? . What day of the month is it ? JVe abbiamo quindici ? .... It is the fifteenth. 140. The conjunction and is omitted between the numbers in the notation of years ; as, Mille otto cento cinquanta. One thousand eight hundred and fifty. 141. The indefinite article one or a is also omitted before hundred and thousand ; as. Cento cavalli . . . One hundred horses. Mille soldati ... A thousand soldiers. 142. The date of the century is preceded by the article ; as, JVel 1858, and not in 1858. 143. In mentioning the various epochs, the numeral mille is omitted ; as, Uno scriltore del trecento, and not del mille trecento. 62 N'JMERAL ADJECTIVES. 144. Cardinal numbers, with the exception of uno, are employed for the date of the month ; as, E primoy il due, il venti . The first, the second, the third. A quanii siamo del mese ? . What day of the month is it? Siamo al quindici .... It is the fifteenth. 145. In dating letters, the article may be used in the singular or plural, and the preposition di expressed or omitted ; as, n or li 24 di GiugnOy or il 24 Giugno. 146. The expressions twelve hundred, twenty-five hundred J etc., must be expressed by one thousand two hundred, two thousand five hundred, etc. ; as, Abbiamo due mila trecento franchi. 147. In multiplication the word via is used instead of times ; as. Due via due f anno quattro. Two times two make four. 148. Cardinal numbers generally precede the nouns J as, Abbiamo cento venti franchi. N. B. — They follow the noun when we wish to fix the attention to the number, rather than to the object it accompanies ; as, Abbiamo franchi centoventi. EXAJMPLES. It was last week that I spoke to Fu la setth lana passata che to your friend. parlai al vostro amico. I have not been able to find work lo non sono stato capace di tro- for your son. vare lavoro per vostro figlio. You are not able to sing an Ital- Voi non siete capace di cantart ian song. una canzone Italiana. I thank you, sir. Grazie, signore. Where is your friend going ? Dove va il vostro amico ? He is going into the country. Egli va in campagna. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 63 VOCABULARY. Able . . . To believe Boy . . . Certainly . Cloud . . Command Destiny . Door . . . Gardener . Labor . . Mile. Credere. Ragazzo. Certamente, JVuvola. Comando. Destino. Porta. Giardiniere. Lavoro. To lose .... Near, nearly . To neglect . . Noise .... Prayer, request Prince .... Round .... Scene .... To wish . . . To work . . . Perdere. Vicino, quasi Trascurare. Rumor e. Preghiera Principe. Rotondo. Scena. Desiderare Lavorare. EXERCISE XVIII. Is this man a merchant? No, sir ; this is the man who sold you his black horse last winter. My black horse ! I did not buy it last winter. Then it was last summer. Are you afraid of my dog? I am not afraid of your dog ; I am ashamed of you. Of me! what have I done? You have not assisted that poor man ; he is poor and without work, has three children ; and you ask me what you have done ! You have neglected him, and you have forgotten my request. Why do you speak so? I have not forgotten your command,* but I have not been able to assist him as I wish. Why do you not make him work in your father's garden ? My father has two very able gardeners, and they never work in winter ; when December is near, they go to their houses and stay with their families four months, from December to March. Is your son afraid to go to my friend's store? He is not afraid ; but he has not studied his lesson, and he has no time. Why does your sister cry? She has lost twenty-five dollars. What noise is this ? ! your sister ; how do you do, madam? I am very well, sir, I thank you. But you are not very well ; what is the matter with you ? Nothing is the matter with me, sir ; I had twenty-five dollars in my hand this morning, and now I am not able to find a shilling. If I show you where the money is, will you give me this rose ? If you will show me where it is, I will certainly give you the rose, and all the flowers which I have in my room, in my gar- den, and in my brother's garden Your money is in that hand- kerchief on that round table near the door. I am very much obliged to you, sir. 64 INTEEROGATIVE PRONOUNS. LESSON XX, INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 149. The Interrogative Pronouns are as fol. lows: Chi Who. I Quale .... Which one. Che What. I Quanto . . . How much. 150. CM is used substantively for persons j as, Chi e venuto con voi? Who has come with you ? Chi e la? Who is there? A chi scrivete ? To whom do you write ? 151. CJie, without a noun, is used for things indefinitely, and signifies che cosa? what thing? as, Che volete da me? . . . ' . . . What do you want of me ? Di che parlate ? Of what (thing) do you speak ? 152. Quale, without a noun, is used for things definitely; as. Quale voleiCy il buono o il caitivo ? Which do you like, the good or bad one ? Quale sceglietCi questo o quello ? Which do you choose, this or that one ? 153. QuantOj used substantively, is invariable ; as, ^'Uanto costa questo ? . . How much does that cost ? Quanto vi resia a fare ? . How much does there remain to you to do ? Quanto, used adjectively, agrees with the noun; as, Quanto denaro ") . . . How much money ") ,, , 4 fvi resta ? „ , *' >■ have you left ? Quanta carta ) How much paper J ^ Quanti libri 'I , , „ How many books ^ , ri i 4 l' legffcte ? „ \ do you read ? Quante carte ) ^^ How many papers j INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 65 154. die and quale or qual (plural, quali or qnai) joined to nouns, have a different meaning. Che directs the question to the intrinsic merit of the object ; quale is used in any other inquiry ; as, Che libro leggete ? . . . . What book are you reading ? Leggo un buon libra .... I am reading a good book. Qual libro leggete? .... Which book are you reading ? Leggo il vostro I am reading yours. Che lavoratori son questi ? . What kind of workmen are these ? Sono molto abili They are very skilful. Quai lavoratori son questi ? . Which workmen are these ? Sono quelli di mio padre . . They are my father's. 155. Cui is also used sometimes, in classic authors, as an interrogative pronoun, instead of cJii ; as. Con cui andrete voi ? With whom will you go ? 156. Che, quale, and quanta, are also used as exclamations ; as, Che bel quadro ! What a beautiful picture ! Qiiale strepito ! What a noise ! Quanto ho sofferto ! . . . How much have I suffered ! EXAMPLES. I bought ten books yesterday. lo comprai died libri ieri. I shall buy a book if I have lo comprero un libro se avrb money. denaro. I am going to buy a new hat to- lo comprero un cappello nuovo morrow. doinani. When shall you go to the book- Quando andrete dal libraio? seller's ? Vou are not right in calling him a Voi non avete ragione di chia fool. marlo matto. How many books have you re- Quanti libri avete voi ricevulo ceived this month ? questo mese ? 4 66 INTERROGATITE PRONOUNS. VOCABULARY. Banker Banchiere. Beggar Mendico. Blind Cieco. Bookseller . . . Libraio. California . . . California. To create .... Creare. Crown (a coin) . Scudo. Dollar Dollar o._ To enjoy .... Godere. Envy Invidia. Fool Matto. Gun Fucile. Hatter Cappellaio. Head Testa. Intelligent .... Jntelligente, Number JVumero. Respectful .... Rispetioso, Servant Servitore. To run Correre. World Mondo. EXERCISE XIX. How many trees have you bought this week? I bought BIX Monday, sixteen yesterday, and to-morrow I shall buy twenty-one trees, if I have money. I will give you the money for the twenty-one trees that you are going to buy to- morrow. You are very kind, sir. Which book is this ? The bookseller sent it to my father. When shall we go to the tai- lor's? To-morrow. What shall you do with your gun? I will give it to my brother. How many horses has your father ? He has four. Lend me some money. How much? Three hun- dred and sixty dollars. I have not the money with me ; I paid three thousand and twenty-one crowns to my banker, and I have but one hundred and six dollars. Are you afraid to lend me money? I am not afraid. Then I shall send my servant. Very well. Is this the man of whom you speak so often ? Yes, sir ; this is the man of whom I have spoken so often, and of whom I speak this moment, and I shall always speak well of him. What has he done ? Do you not believe me ? Yes, I believe that you enjoy his company ; but who is he ? He is a man of merit, generous and intelligent. Shall I speak the truth ? Certainly. There are a great many fools in this world, and you are one of the number. Why, sir ? Because I think that you are blind, and that he is a beggar. A beggar !.he is a man of honor, sir ; and you are wrong in calling him a beggar ; if he has no mc ney , he has a heart and a head. Have I not a heart and head too ? Yes, sir ; but your heart was created in Cali- fornia, and your head in your father's garden. REGULAR VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 67 LESSON XXI REGULAR VERBS. .NFtECTION OF A REGULAR VERB OF THE TIHRD CONJUGATION. PARTIRE, TO DEPART. Present. Parto Parti Parte 157. gation 158. retain sound . I depart. . Thou departest. . He departs. We depart. You depart. They depart. Pariiamo . Partite . . Partono . . (See model, page 199.) There are but few verbs of the third conju- which are regular. (See list, page 218.) The verbs in which ire is preceded by a c the i before o and a, to preserve the soft of the infinitive ; thus, Cucire makes cucio, cuciay and not cuco, cuca. 159. Some of the verbs of this conjugation add the letters isc before the regular inflection of all the persons of the singular, and of the third person plu- ral of the imperative, as well as the present indica- tive and subjunctive. Thus, gioire, to enjoy, makes Present. Indicative. Subjunctive. Gio-isc-a. Imperative. And not Gio-isc-o, Gioo, Gioa. ■ Gio-isc-i, Gio-isc-a, Gio-isc-i. Gioi, Gioa, Gioi. Gio-isc-e, Gio-isc-a, Gio-isc-a. Gioe, Gioa, Gioa. Gioiamo, Gioiamo, Gioiamo. — — — Gioite, Gioiate, Gioite. — — — Gio-isc-onc , Gio-isc-ano, Gio-isc-ano. Gioono, Gioano, Gioam N B. — The first and second persons plural are never irregular. 68 EEGULAR VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 160. Some of these verbs can be conjugated with or without this addition ; viz., nutrire makes nutre and nutrisco. KB. — For the verbs in which the termination isco is retained or rejected, see list, page 206. For the verbs in which isco is indispensable, see list, page 203. 161. In counting the hours of the day, the defi- nite article is added to the cardinal number, and the rioun is omitted. The verb to he must agree with the subject which always follows the verb, except in an interrogative sentence ; as, Che oral? What hour is it ? E V una It is one o'clock. Sono le due It is two o'clock. 162. Mezzo, half, after the noun is invariable. It agrees with the noun when it precedes it ; as, Un*ora€ mezzo An hour and a half. Due ore e mezzo Two hours and a half. Una mezza or a Half an hour. 163. Half past twelve is idiomatically expressed by tJie Jialf; as, E la mezza. It is half past twelve. 164. But generally, after twelve, the word ^05^ is translated by dopo, after ; as, Egli venne ieri alia mezza dopo He came yesterday at half past mezzo giorno. twelve. 165. A quarter past, half pa^t, are expressed by a quarter, half, joined to the noun by the conjunc- tion and; as, Sono le ire ed un quarto . It is a quarter past three. Sono le otto e mezzo ... It is half past eight. REGULAR VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 69 166. A quarter of is expressed by meno un quarto, which is always placed after the whole number ; as, Sono Ic due meno un quarto, or|i^ j^ ^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ E Vuna, e Ire quarii. ) 167. Ago is expressed by fa at the end of the phrase, or by sono or e at the beginning of it ; as, Due giorni fa. | ^^^ ^^^.^ ^^^^ Un anno fa. | ^ ^^^^ ^^^^ Sono due giorni.) E un anno. ) 168. The preposition in is omitted in Italian before the words mattina, morning ; dopo pranzOj afternoon ; sera, evening ; notte, night. It is changed into of, if the hour is mentioned ; as, La mattina, la sera . . . In the morning, or in the evening. Jllle cinque delta sera ... At five o'clock in the evening. EXAjVIPLES. Have you found your cane ? Avete trovato il vostro bastojie ? I dress myself at half past six. lo mi vesto alle sei e mezzo. Have you already forgotten it? U avete voigia dimenticato ? I do not think I shall be able to lo non credo di esser capace d\ go to the ball to-night. andare al ballo questa sera. At what time in the evening ? A che era delta sera ? At a quarter past twelve. Ad un quarto dopo mezzanotte. AMOR TIMIDO. Placido zeffiretto, Se trovi il caro oggettc Digli che sei sospiro, Ma non gli dir di chi. Limpido ruscelletto Se mai t'incontri in lei, Dille che pianto sei Ma non le dir qual ciglio Crescer ti fe' cosi. 70 REGULAR VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. VOCABULARY. Already Gia. Ancient Antico. Ass Anno. Breakfast Colazione. Cane, stick .... Bastone. To comb Pettinare. Corner Angola. Ear Orecchio, Dark Oscuro. Dinner Pranzo. To finish . Folly . . To hear . Minute . . To play . To print . Prose . . Rare . . . To sleep . To think . Finire. Follia. Sentire. Minuto. SuonarBy giocare Stampare. Prosa. Rare. Dormire. Pensare. EXERCISE XX. Am I not a good boy ? Not always. When am I not a good boy? "When you do not study your lesson. And when am I a good boy? When you sleep. Then, good-night. Where are you going ? I am going to be a good boy. How many hours do you sleep in the night ? I sleep — let me think — one, two, three, four, four — what is the number after four ? Five. Five, six, seven, eight — how many hours are there from seven to eight ? One hour. Then I sleep only one hour. Only one hour? Yes, sir ; an hour. I go to bed at seven o'clock, and I dress myself when the bell rings for breakfast at eight o'clock in the morning. How many hours do you work ? I work six hours and a half. What o'clock is it? It is a quarter of nine. At what time shall you go to the bookseller's ? I had already for- gotten it ; probably at half past twelve. Then I shall go with you, because I (have) wish to buy a few books, and I am sure that he will show me particular attention if I (shall) go with you. I shall be at your service. I thank you, sir. Let us see what you have done to-day. I have not done anything. Have you not studied your French lesson ? Yes, sir ; I studied it two hours and a half, from eleven till half past twelve. That makes an hour and a half. Is it possible? Yes, an hour and a half, and, after all, I do not think I shall be able to recite it this after- noon. At what time in the afternoon ? At a quarter of five At what time do you dine? We dine at a quarter past two, and I shall be at table twenty-one minutes. Then you have three hours for your lesson : an hour and a quarter before dinner, and an hour and three quarters after dinner. CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 71 LESSON XXII. CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS, continued 169. The Conjunctive Pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, change the i into e, and gli adds an e, when immedi- ately followed by the pronouns lo, la, li, le, ne. 170. If the conjunctive pronouns follow the verb, they are joined to it, and make one word. If they precede the verb, they can be united only when the last pronoun is lo, which loses the o when the fol- lowing verb commences with a consonant, except z or impure s; as, Te la mandero, or manderottela. ^ Tel TTMndero, or manderottelo. I I will send it to you. Te lo spedirOi or spedirottelo. J Fe ne mandero, or manderovvene. I will send you some. 171. Gli is never separated from the following pronoun, whether it precedes or follows the verb. Thus used, it can be applied to both genders ; as, Egli glielo mando, or mandoglielo. He sent it to him, or to her. 172. Loro is never united >to any pronoun, and must always follow the verb. 173. When the pronouns lo, la, li, le, and ne, are used in connection with ?oro, they must precede the verb, except in those cases in which they are affixed to it ; as, Lo mandai loro I sent it to them. Mandatelo loro Send it to them. JVon lo mandate loro Do not send it to them. 72 CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 174. When an infinitive is followed by another, the conjunctive pronoun is affixed to the first ; as, Spero poterla vedere, and not spero poter vederla. 175. The conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, though not followed by the pronouns lo, la, li, le, ne, may be expressed by me, te, noi, vol, se, used after the verb and not joined to it; but this form is used only when we wish to designate the person in a manner more precise, and to the exclu- sion of all other persons ; thus : He loves me may be expressed by Egli mi ama, or by Ugli ama me ; but, Ugli mi ama has the meaning that he loves me, and that he may love others ; whilst Egli ama me shows that I am the only person loved by him, and that no other person shares his love. N. B. — E(/li mi ama is then properly translated by He loves me. E(/li ama me should be translated by He loves but me. 176. Auxiliary verbs or present participles which in English precede the past participle are omitted in Italian ; the conjunctive pronoun is then affixed to the past participle ; as, Vedutala in quelle stato, piansi e pregai. Having seen her in that condition, I wept and prayed. 177. When a pronoun forms one of two or more objects of the same verb, it is never used conjunc- tively ; as, Jo scrissi a luiy e non a lei, and not lo gli scrissiy e non a lei. Jo non scrissi ne a voi ne a vostra sorellay and not Jo non vi scrissi. 178. The pronouns ci and vi are also employed as adverbs instead of qui, here, and li, there ; as, Jo ci rimarru, or io rimarro qui . . I will remain here. Jo vi andro, or io andro 11 . I shall go there. CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 73 In this case, if they are used with the conjunctive pronouns ci and vi, they must follow them, and may be used the one for the other, when the law of euphony requires it ; thus, t-r -I • 1 ( Vol ci vi fate rimanere, not \ ou make us remain here . j ''"'■'-'■ '^'' ^"^"^ ' """■ "" > C Voi ci ci fate rimanere. We send you there .... -f-^^'' ^^ "" ^^^^^^o^ ^^^ IJVoi vi vi mandiamo. I go there lo ci vadOy not io vi vado. They can be transposed, when harmony requires it: He will see us there ( Egli vi ci vedra^ better than I Egli ci vi vedra. TABLE OF THE COMPOUND CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. Me, to me . . Te, to thee . . f to oneself 'I to themselves Ce, to us . Ve, to you . to him to her Gli-e ■{ Lo, him or it La, her or it Li, them Le, them Ne, some of it lo ; la ; li, le ; ne* him or it ; her or it ; them ; some of it. loro, to them. EXAMPLES Did he give you the books which Vi diede egli i libri che mio padre my father sent to you? vi mandb ? He gave them to me yesterday. Egli me li diede ieri. How many books have you now ? Quanti libri avete ora ? * The pronouns of the first column are to be prefixed to those of the second, as occasion may require ; as, melo., it to me u CC-pTJUNCTIVE peonouns. VOCABULARY. Amiable . . Brother-in-law Comb . . Compliment Despotism Dictate . . To excuse To follow . Grief . . Kingdom . Amabile. Cognato. Pettine. Complimento. Dispotiswo. JDettame. Scusare. Seguire. Affanno. Regno. Ill, unwell Illness . . Letter . . To moralize To resemble Ridicule . To sell . . Stone . . To succeed Sure , . . Ammalato. Malattia. Lettera. Moralizzare. Kassomigliare . Ridicolo. Fender e. Pietra. Riuscire. Sicuro. EXERCISE XXI. Who is sick? My brother's child is sick. What is the mat- ter with him? He has been sick for some time, with a fever. Did you give him the flowers which my friend sent him ? Yes, sir; I gave them to him yesterday. How old is he? He is seven years old. Give him this rose. I will give it to him with pleasure. When will you give it to him? This afternoon. Then, if you send your servant to my house, I will give him some flowers for the boy, and for his pretty sister. Why do you not send me some roses? Because you are not sick. But my pretty niece is not sick. Well, she is not sick, but she is lovely, and the flowers of my garden are for her, and (for) those who resemble her. Excuse me, sir ; but you are a little partial. Probably ; but I follow the dictates of my heart. Is it always safe to follow the dictates of the heart ? Do not begin your old story. Will you buy my horse? I have two. WiU you sell them to me? One is already sold. To whom? To my brother- in-law. When did you sell it to him ? Three days ago. For how much ? Two hundred and fifty dollars. Then you have not two horses ; you have but one. Well, it was only to make you understand that I have no need 3f your horse. You are right, sir. My friends sent this note, asking me to lend them the two books of which you spoke yesterday. They are on that round table ; send them to them with my compliments. What is the matter with your brother ? Nothing is the matter with him. What have you bought? I have bought three birds. To whom shall you give them ? I shall give them to my sister. She has two cats, and cats and birds are not good friends. REMARKS ON THE REGULAR VERBS. 4 LESSON XXIII REMARKS ON THE REGULAR VERBS. 179. The first person plural of every tense ends in mo. The second person plural of every tense ends in te. The third person plural of every tense ends in no. N. B. — Modern writers have adopted the termination rOy instead of nOy in the third person plural of the conditional, and of the imper- fect subjunctive. 180. The accent in the third person plural of the present and imperfect indicative, and in the present subjunctive, falls always on the last vowel but two, and not on the last vowel but one, as in the other persons of the same tenses ; as, amo, ami, ama, amiamo, amate, amano. amava, amavi, amava, amavamo, amavate, amavano. ami, ami, ami, amiamo, amiate, amino. N. B. — In some parts of Italy the regular termination of the first person singular of the imperfect is often changed from a into o ; as, Amavo, temevo, dormivOy instead of amava, temeva, dormiva. It is to be regretted that this change has not been generally adopted, because, if it were, the first person could not be mistaken for the third person of the same tense. 181. Some verbs have a double termination ; as, Tmpazzare and impazzire. Compiere and compire. With the termination in are and ere, they are regular. With the termination in ire, they form the present in isco. 76 REMARKS ON THE REGULAR VERBS. COLLECTIVE NUMBERS. 182. The Collectiye Numbers are as follows: Unpaio . . . Una decina . . Una dozzina . Una quindicina Una ventina . Una trentina Una quarantina Una cinquantina Un centinaio Un migliaio A pair. Half a score. A dozen. About fifteen. A score. About thirty. About forty. About fifty. About a hundred. About a thousand. DISTRIBUTIVE NUMBERS. Ad uno ad uno A due a due . A died a died A venti a venti Una volta Due volte Tre volte One by one. Two by two. Ten by ten. Twenty by twenty. Once. Twice. Three times. Primieramente, or in primo luogo . . . Firstly. Secondariamente, or in secondo luogo . . Secondly. In terzo luogo Thirdly. In quarto luogo Fourthly. EXAMPLES. I am much obliged to you, sir. I have not had any answer. I will not fail to speak to him about it to-morrow. Be sure of it, sir. Be sure of it, madam. lo vi sono mollo ohbligaiOy signore. Jo non ho avuto nesstma risposta. lo non manchero di parlargliene domain. Siatene sicuro, signore. Siatene sicura, signora. REMARKS ON THE REGULAR VERBS. 77 VOCABULARY. Answer Concert To copy Disposed Engagement Exhibition Favor . . To fear . 3entleman Invitation To invite Risposia. Concerto. Copiare. Disposto. Impegno. JSsibizione. Favor e. Temere. Gentiluomo. Invito. Invitare. Lovely Amabile. Medicine Medicina Model Moddlo. To oblige Obbligare Terfect Perfetto. Pocket Tasca. Storm Tempesta. Terrible Terribile. Theatre Teatro. To want Bisognare Wife Moglie. EXERCISE XXII. Give me the sugar, I have no sugar. Give me something then. I have nothing. Where is the knife? On the table, with the fork and the spoon. Where is the English grammar ? In my room. Have you copied your French translation ? I have copied it twice. Have you lost your key ? My key is in my pocket. Whose key is this? It is my brother's. He who loves, fears. Are you disposed to do me a favor ? I am at your service. Lend me your horse, then. My horse is lame. Did you go to my father's yesterday? Yes, sir; I was with him, and I enjoyed his agreeable company for two hours and a half. Have you any pens? I have a great many. Give me some. How many ? Give me a dozen. Did you find many friends at the theatre ? Not many ; half a score, I think. With whom did you go? I went with your brother's friend and his wife. Was their little daughter with them? Yes, she was with us. Is she not a very lovely creature? Yes, she is a model of beauty. Shall you go to the great ball to-night? Yes, I have already invited your niece. Has she accepted the invitation ? I have had no answer yet. When did you send your invita- tion? This morning, at half past eight. Probably she was not at home ; she went to the exhibition this morning. I hope (that) she will send me an answer soon. She will not fail to send you an answer ; be sure of it. But when will she send it ? It is already a quarter of four, and I have made no other engage- ment. Have you any good gloves ? I have some, but they are not very good. Will you accept this pair ? I thank you sir. 78 NUMBERS. LESSON XXIV. ORDINAL NUMBERS. Frimo First. Secondo .... . Second. Terzo Third. Quarto Fourth. Quinto Fifth. Sesto Sixth. Settimo Seventh. Oltavo Eighth. Nono Ninth. JDedmo Tenth. XJndecimo Eleventh. Duodecimo Twelfth. Decimo terzo Thirteenth. Decimo quarto Fourteenth. Decimo quinto Fifteenth. Decimo sesio Sixteenth. Decimo settimo Seventeenth. Decimo ottavo Eighteenth. Decimo nono Nineteenth. Ventedmo or vigedmo . . Twentieth. Treniesimo Thirtieth. Quarantesimo Fortieth. Cinquantesimo . . . . . Fiftieth. Sessantesimo Sixtieth. Settantesimo Seventieth. Ottantesimo Eightieth. Novantesimo Ninetieth. Centesimo One hundredth. Millesimo One thousandth. Milionesimo One millionth. NUMBERS. 79 183. Ordinal numbers are variable, and agree with their substantives ; thus, Atto quarto, scena terza. Act fourth, scene third. 184. If the ordinal number is a compound num- ber, both numbers must agree with the noun ; as, La lezione decima quarta . . The fourteenth lesson. Le decime qidnte file Literally -. The fifteenth rows. 185. Ordinal numbers, commencing from the thir- teenth, can also be formed by changing the last vowel of the cardinal numbers into esimo ; as, Tredicesimo Thirteenth. Quattordicesimo Fourteenth. Quindicesimo Fifteenth. Sedicesimo Sixteenth. Diciasseitesimo Seventeenth. Diciottesimo Eighteenth. Ventiduesimo Twenty -second. Quarantacinquesimo .... Forty-fifth. Sessantasettesimo Sixty-seventh. Centotrentacinquesimo . . . One hundred and thirty-fifth. Milletrecentoventiquattresimo Thirteen hundred twenty-fourth. Doppio . . Double Triplo . . Triple. PROPORTIONAL NUMBERS. Quintuplo . Quintuple. Decuplo . Ten-fold. Gentuplo . A hundred-fold. QuadrupJo . Quadruple. 186. Proportional numbers are variable ; as, Doppie maniche, double sleeves. Doppia inferriata, double grate. EXAMPLES. If I were sure of what he says. Sefossi sicuro di cio che dice. Be sure of it. Siatene sicuro. have not received a letter for six JVon ho ricevuto una letiera da months. sei mesi. 80 NUMBERS. VOCABULARY. Advice Beside . . Catalogue To classify Composition Course Cruel . . Difficulty To examine German . Heartily". Consiglio. Fuori di. Catalogo. Classificare. Composizione. Corso. Crudele. Bifficolta. Esaminare. Tedesco. Di cuore. Journey, travel Library , . . To persevere Sincere . . . Sail . . . . Spanish . . Vanity . . . Viper . . . Volume . . Viaggio. Libreria, Pagina. Perseverare. Sincero. Vela. Spagnuolo. Vanita. Vipera. Volume. EXERCISE XXIII. Shall I give your books to the bookseller ? Give them to him; if you wish. Shall I give them to his friend? Give them tc him or to his friend. Why do you not speak? Because I am afraid of making mistakes. You will never speak well, if you are afraid of making mistakes. Have you examined your French composition? I examined it yesterday. How many mistakes did you find on the first page? A dozen. How many on the second ? About twice as many. Twenty-four mis- takes ! what shall I do ? What shall you do ? Study, perse- vere, and I am sure that you will overcome all difficulty in your translation. If I were sure of it ! What would you do ? I would study heartily. Study, then, and be sure to make no mistakes in the course of six months. Is this your sincere advice ? The advice which I give you is the same which I have given to my brother, sisters, and friends. IIow many volumes are there in this library? About fifty thousand. Have you the catalogue ? Yes, sir ; you will find the books classified : the English books are from the first page to the seventy-sixth — about forty thousand ; the German, from the seventy-seventh page to the ninety-first page — about thirty-seven hundred volumes ; the others are French, Italian, and Spanish books. What is the matter with your sister ? She is beside herself, for joy. "Why ? Her friend, who has been absent two years and a half, and from whom she had not received a letter for seven months, arrived yesterday. Where is he? Ho is with her, and they are nappy. IRREGULAR VERBS. 81 LESSON XXV IREEGULAR VERBS. 187. The irregularity of the Italian verbs is com- monly in the perfect, and occasionally in the present of the indicative and subjunctive moods, in the future, conditional, and imperative. IRREGULARITY OP THE PERFECT. 188. The verb accendere, to kindle, is irregular in its perfect. Instead of accendei it makes accesi. accende •' " accenderono " accesero. N. B. — The second person singular (accendesti) and the first and second persons plural {accendemmo, accendesie) are always regular. From this example, it may be seen : 1. That the irregularity of the perfect is in the first and third persons singular, and in the third per- son plural. 2. That the third person singular is formed by changing the i of the first person into e. d. That the third person plural is formed by adding ro to the third person singular. N. B . — The above rules hold good for all irregular perfects. 82 IRREGULAR VERBS. IRREGULARITY OF THE PRESENT AND IMPERATIVE 189. If the verb venire were regular, it would make for the Present Indicatiye. Pres. Subjunctive. Imperative. VenOy Venuy Veni, Venuy Veni, VenCy Venay Vena, VeniamOy VeniainOy VeniamOy VenitBy VeniaUy Venite, Venono. Venano, VevMno. But, as it is irregular, it makes VengOy Vengay Vieniy Vengay Vienty Vieney Vengay Vengay VeniamOy VeniamOy VeniamOy Venitey Veniatey Venitey Vengono, Vengano. Vengano. From the above, it may be seen: 1. That the second persons singular and plural of the present indicative and imperative are alike. 2. That the three persons singular of the present subjunctive and the third person singular of the imperative are alike, and formed by changing the o of the first person of the present indicative into a. 3. That the third person plural of the present subjunctive and of the imperative are alike, and formed by adding no to the third person singular. 4. That an a is added before the termination te of the second person plural indicative, to form the same person plural of the present subjunctive. N. B. — Verbs of the second conjugation change ete into iale. IRREGULAR VERBS. 83 IRREGULARITY OF THE FTTTURE AND CONDITIONAL 190. The termination of the future, regular or irregular, is always rb, raij rd remo, rete, ranno. 191. The termination of the conditional is always rei, resti, rehbe, remmo, resfe, rehhero. 192. Ifvalere, to be worth, were regular, it would make for the Future. Conditional. Valeroy Valerei, Valeraiy Valerestiy Valera, Valerebbey ValeremOy Valeremmo, Valerete, Valereste, Valeranno. Valerebbero. Ls irregular, it makes Varro, ' Varreiy Varrai, Varrestiy Varra, VarrebbCy VarremOf Varremmo, Varretey VarrestCy Varranno. Varrebbero. From the above, it may be seen : 1. That the irregularity of the future and condi- tional rests only on the change or omission of one or more of the letters preceding the regular termination. 2. That the alteration which takes place in the first person singular of the future is carried through all the other persons of the same future, and of the conditional. S4 IRREGULAR VERBS. RfeUMl: OF THE ABOVE RULES. 193. In order to master the Italian irregular rerbs, it is required to know : 1. The present indicative. 2. The first person of the perfect. 3. The first person of the future. 4. The past participle. 1^ The first person of the perfect and future and the past par ticiple -will be found in the list, page 207. The few irregular presents, and any other exceptions to the above rules, will be found in a separate list, page 219. EXAMPLES. He gave me a great deal of sugar. Egli mi diede molto zucchero. Look at this portrait. Guardate questo ritratto. May I ask you a question ? Potreifarvi una domanda ? He asked a favor of me to-night. Mi domando un favore sla sera. I intend to go to the ball. Ho intenzione di andare al ballo EXTRACT FROM LE NOTTI ROMANE. Romolo fiso allora gli occhi alia sua lancia formidabili come lei, e robustamente col piede nel mezzo la spezzo. Poscia, get- tando a terra con dispettoso cruccio i due tronchi, in voce com- pressa mormoro : Yanne, ministra d'imperio affannosa : il lituo fu pill di te potente o felice. Per qual fato io risurgo, e veggo la mia citth, ora trionfante con discipHne contrarie alle mie? E tu che fortemente sostieni i nostri aspetti, se mai narri a questi abitatori, forse non creduta maraviglia, ciob che meco ragionasti, di' loro che altrettanta io ne provai da te ascoltando il presente imperio ; che vidi Roma, non la canobbi, e discendo. Sparve, e il monte muggi con rombo di terremoto. Si aperse la terra sotto Io spettro sdegnoso, e in quella sospirando piomb6, coprendosi il volto con la visiera. Le ombre raccolsoro i tronchi dell' asta fondatrice del glorioso imperio, e I'une all'altre in silenzio se li mostravano. IREEGULAR VERBS. 85 VOCABULARY. To belong Bottle . Distance Eternal Glory . To imitate Imported To paint Palace . Petition Appartenere. Bottiylia. Distanza. Eterno. Gloria. Jmitare. Imporiato. Fittare. Palazzo. Petizione. Portrait .... Ritratto. Question .... Domanda, Receipt Ricevuta. To revenge . . . Vendicarsi. To see Vedere. Sight Vista. Society Societa. Steam Vapore. Trouble Imbarazzo. Truly ..... Veramente. EXERCISE XXIV. Good-morning, John. Good-morning, William. How dc you do, to-day? I am not very well. What is the matter with you ? I am in trouble. What can I do for you ? You can do a great deal for me. I am at your service. To-day is the twenty-seventh of the month ; I receive my money the twenty- ninth, and — And what ? And Look at that paper on the table. You must pay two hundred and fifty dollars to-day, and you have not the money ; is that all? Yes. Two hundred, twenty and twenty are forty, and ten makes fifty ; two hundred and fifty ; are you still in trouble? I am much obliged to you ; shall I give you the receipt ? I have never given you a receipt when you have lent me money. I thank you. Have you seen my portrait ? It is very good ; who painted it ? The same painter who painted my two children's portraits. It is truly beautiful. How much did it cost? One hundred and fifty dol- lars. It is not very dear. Are you hungry ? No, I am thirsty. What shall I give you ? Give me some wine. Are you not ashamed? Of what? Have you forgotten that 1 belong to the temperance society? No, I have not forgotten it. Then why do you ask me such questions ? You are right ; I cannot speak. Why not? May I ask you a question? Certainly. Have you not a trunk full of wines ? Yes ; but my wines are imported. What is the difference ? The difference is this : that not many can pay two dollars a bottle for imported wines. May I ask a favor of you ? Certainly. Can you lend me your black horse? Yes, with pleasure; where do you intend to go? To my father's. How is your father? He is very well, but my mother is ill. 86 AGREEMENT OF THE VERBS. LESSON XXVI. AGREEMENT OF THE VERBS. 104. Every verb agrees with its subject ; as, Guglielmo e ricco William is rich. JVoi siamo ricchi We are rich. 195. If the subject has several nominatives in different persons, the verb is put in the first person, if one of the nominatives is in the first person ; as, Guglielmo, Giovanni, voi ed io siamo ricchi. William, John, you and I are rich. 196. If one of the nominatives is in the second person, and the others in the third, the verb must agree with the second person ; as, Guglielmo, Giovanni e voi siete ricchi. William, John and you are rich. 197. If all the nominatives are in the third per- son, the verb is put in the third person; as, Guglielmo e Giovanni sono ricchi. William and John are rich. USE OF THE IMPERFECT AND PERFECT. 198. A past action is, in Italian, expressed by either the imperfect or perfect tense. 199. The imperfect tense is used : 1. To express an action which was still existing (going on) when another action, expressed or understood, took place. This may be ascertained oy observing whether the English past tense can be AGREEMENT OF THE VERBS. 87 changed into was, joined to the present participle of the verb in question ; as, Quando voi entrasie io scriveva lettere. When you entered I wrote (I was writing) letters. 2. To express the repetition of a past action, or the habit of having performed some action. This may be ascertained by observing whether the Enghsh past tense can be changed into / used to, with the infinitive of the given tense, without alter- ing its signification j as, Io andava alia scuola ogni giorno. I went (used to go) to school every day. 200. There is but one imperfect in Italian ; thus, / wmti or / used to go, is always expressed by Io andava. 201. The past tense is used to express an action which is completely past, and which has no relation to any other action ; as, leri scrissi lettere. Yesterday I wrote letters. 202. In speaking of a past action which is not determined by any circumstance, it is left to our will to use either the perfect or the imperfect j thus, we may say, Cesarefu grande e valor oso, or ) ^ x i t ^ ^ , , ^ Caesar was great and vahant. Cesare era grande e valoroso. ) But in the first case the tense of the verb is inde- pendent of any other ; in the second, it is associated with some other which is understood, such as when he lived, or when he fought. EXAJVIPLES. How many pages have you read ? Quanie pagine avete letto? I have read but seven pages. JVon ho htto che sette pagine. 88 AGREEMENT OF THE VERBS. VOCABULARY. Advantage .... Vantaggio. Affable AffabUe. Auction Incanto. Berlin Berlino. To come Venire. To compel .... For z are. To fly Fuggire. Grapes Uva. To humiliate . . . Umiliare. To know* .... Sapere. Occasion . . Occasione. Person . . . Persona. To read . . Leggere. To say . . . Dire. Season . . . Stagione. To turn . . Voltare, girare. To unite, add Unire^ aggiungere. Victorious . Vittorioso. AVinter. . . Inverno. To "write . . Scrivere. ' To know has also the meaning of conoscere, to be acquainted with EXERCISE XXV. Where are your brothers going? They are going to the exhibition. Why did you not go with them? Because I was not ready. Have you spoken to my father ? I have not spoken to him. What are you writing? I am writing a letter. To whom ? To my friend. You and your friend have always been good friends, but I and my brother have never found a true friend. Does your friend write to you often ? He wrote two long letters last week, and he used to write three letters a week, when he was in Paris. My mother was always affable, but on this occasion she was affable and generous. How many pages of that book have you copied? I have copied twenty-two pages. To-day I copied only four pages, and yesterday I (of them) copied six ; yet there was a time when I copied twelve pages every day. Have you any good books ? No, sir. You used to have very good books last winter ; what have you done with them? It is true that I had very good books last winter, but, as very few persons came to buy them, and I was in great want of money, I sold them at auction. Were you at home when my friend came? Yes, I was at home. What were you doing? I and my sisters were reading a German book. Did he speak German ? No, he said that he used to speak German two years ago, when he was in Berlin, but that now be had forgotten almost all of it. Did you believe it? I did not believe it ; but what could I do? You could have done wliat I did yesterday. What did you do yesterday? I made him speak German with out asking whether he knew German or not. COMPARATIVES. 89 IiESSON XXVII. COMPARATIVES. 203. A Qualifying Adjective becomes a com. parative : 1. Of equality ; with the following adverbs : TantOj as, so, so much ; correlative quanta, as. Cosij as, so J " come, as. Quanto,eiS TOLUch; " altr ettanto, bo mnoh. Quanta, as much. | ^.^^^^^ correlatives. Alpari ai, like. J Essa e tanto capricciosa quanta She is as capricious as ungrato- ingrata. ful. Voi siete cost miser o come infelice. You are as wretched as unhappy. Quanto e onesio, allretlanto e vir- As much as he is honest, so much tuoso. he is virtuous. Egli e misero quanto voi. He is wretched as much as you. Voi siete al pari di me, infelice. You are like me, unfortunate. 2. Of superiority ; with the adverbs piu, meglio. 3. Of inferiority ; with the adverbs meno, peggio. 204. If the comparison of superiority and infe- riority is between two verbs referring to the same subject, or two adjectives referring to the same noun or pronoun, the connecting than is translated by cJie; as, Voi potete meglio scrivere che You can write better than read. leggere. Voi siete piu saggio che ricco. You are more wise than rich. Voi siete meno ricco che saggio. You are less rich than wise. 5 1)0 COMPAEATIVES. 205. If the comparison is between two nouns or pronouns to which the same adjective refers, than is expressed by di, of (the words in comparison being understood) ; as, Egli e meno forte di voi. He is less strong than you. / re moderni sono piu tiranni The modern kings are greater degli aniichi. tyrants tlian the ancient ones. N. B. — If the word which follows than has a complement under-i stood, che or di may be used, with the difference, that in using che the following pronoun should be in the nominative, as in English ; as, Egli e piu infelice di me. He is more unhappy than I, or Egli e piU infelice che io (the verb non sono being understood). QuesV uomo e piu infelice di quella This man is more unhappy than donna, that woman, or Quesf uomo e piU infelice che quella donna {non e). In such case the Itahans make use of the negative non. In all other comparative phrases, it is better to use che than di; as, E meglio salvare un reo che pu- It is better to save a guilty man nire un innocente. than to punish an innocent one 206. Tale and quale are often used as compara- tives of equality ; as, Felice chi vede le cose tali quali Happy he who sees things as they sono. are. N. B. — Tale is often suppressed ; as, Felice chi vede le cose quali sono. EXAMPLES. Do you know how to translate Sapete voi tradurre quesia pa- this page ? gina ? I am better to-day than I was last Io sto meglio oggi di quel che era week. la setiimana scorsa. To do good to anybody. Far bene a qualcuno. To avoid Atheist . Contagious To deceive Dangerous Fatiguing To gain . Hypocrite Idle . . Injurious COMPARATIVES yi VOCABULARY. Evitare. Miser . . . Avaro. Ateista. Numerous . JSTumeroso. Contat/ioso. Openly . . . Apertamente. lag an nave. Politician . . Politico, Pericoloso. Precious . . Prezioso. Faticoso. Satisfactory . Soddisfacenie. Guadagnare. Shamefully . S vergognatame n it Ipocrita. Skilful . . . Abile. Ozioso. Thief . . . Ladro. Ingiurioso. To translate . Tradurre. EXERCISE XXVI. How many books have you read? I do not know. Have you lead more than I ? I read more in one month than you do in a year. Do you speak French? A little ; but I can write better than I can speak. This is often the case. Nothing is more pre- cious than time. Of two politicians, one as skilful as the other, the one gains who is the more crafty. He who gives is more happy than he who receives. It is easier to advise than to do. It is more difficult to speak a language than to translate it. I have as much money as your brother, but he has more friends than I. My brother knows how to make friends ; and I know that it is easier to make money than to make friends ; and that it is easier to make a friend than to preserve his friendship. Nothing is more satisfactory to man than to do good. To be idle is more fatiguing than to labor, and nothing is more con- tagious than bad examples. Are you sleepy ? Not much ; I am more thirsty than sleepy. Yesterday was colder than to- day, but to-day I am colder than I was yesterday. How can that be ? Yesterday I had a good fire in my room, and to-day I do not find any fire in your house. Is it very cold in this room? I do not know. Why do you speak, then ? Because I am very cold. A miser is as injurious to society as a thief. A hypocrite is more dangerous than an atheist. How can I believe it ? The atheist tells you openly what he is, and what he believes, and you can avoid his company ; the hypocrite teUs you what he is not, and what he does not believe, and you believe him, and you find that he has cheated you shamefully. 92 SUPERLATIVES. LESSON XXVIII. SUPERLATIVES.. 207. There are two forms of the superlative in Italian : the relative and the absolute. 208. The relative superlative is formed by plac- ing the definite article before the adverbs piu and meno, which are used to form the comparative ; as, RiccOy m. s. ■) . , piu ricco ■) . . il piu ricco ) . , , D- ,• >rich. ^ .^ ... Uncher. . .^ . ^. [-richest. Rtcchi, m. p j piu ricchi ) i piu ricchi ) Povera, f. s. ") meno povera) la meno povera^ ^poor. ^poorer. , ^ ^poorest. Fovere, i. p. ) meno povere) le meno povere) Obsekvation. — The definite article is omitted when piu and meno modify a yerb ; as, Quesio e cio che piu mi piace. That is what I like the most. 209. The absolute superlative is formed by adding issim between the last vowel and the preced- ing letter of the qualifying adjective ; as, DottOy dott-issim-o. Dotta, doit-issim-a. Dottiy dott-issim-i. Dotie, dott-issim-e. 210. Adjectives ending in co and go, or ca and ga, take an A, in order to preserve the hard sound of c and g ; as, RiccOy ricchissimo ; lungay lunghissima. 211. Some of the adverbs, as hene, male, poco, molto, spessOj become superlatives by changing tlie last vowel into issimo ; as. La vedo pochitsimOy benche ci vada spessissimo. I see her very little, though I go there very often. SUPERLATIVES. IRREGULAR SUPERLATIVES. ^cret acrid. acerrimOy very acrid. Celebre, celebrated. ccleberrimOf very celebrated. Integro, upright. intcgerrimo^ very upright. Inferiore, inferior. injimot very inferior. MiserOf miserable. miserrimOy very miserable. Saltibre, salubrious. saluberrimOy very salubrious. Superiore, superior. supremo, very superior. 93 N. B. — The comparative and the relative superlative of the above adjectives are formed regularly with the adverbs piu and meno ; as, Ac7-ef meno acre, il meno acre. MiserOf piu misero, il piU miscro. IRREGULAR COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES RETAINED FROM LATIN. BuonOy good. migliore, better. ottimo, best. Cattivo, bad. peggiore, worse. pessimOy worst. Piccolo, small. minore, smaller. minimo, smallest. Grande, great. maggiore, greater. viassimo, greatest N. B. — The above adjectives may form the absolute superlative regularly ; as, buonissimOy cattivissimo, piccolissimOy grandissimo. 5^" The adverbs meglio, peggio, meno, are the comparatives of th* adverbs bene, male, poco. 212. A superlative is formed by simply placing the article between the noun and the adjective ; as, Napoli la hella, Naples the beautiful. N. B. — The repetition of the adjective to form the superlative, as una donna bella bella, is obsolete. EXAMPLES. Which is the best portrait ? My son's is the best. How does your brother speak French ? [ went to see him at the hospital, and he was in very bad humor. QuaV e il miglior ritratto ? Quello di mio figlio e il migliore. Come ^parla vostro fratello il Francese ? lo andai a vederlo alVospedale, ed egli era- di cattivissimo umore. 94 SUPERLATIVES. To conform To consume To convince To deny . To die . . To dispose Heaven . Honorable Hospital . Humor . . Important Conformarsi Consumare. Convincere J^egare. Morire. Disporre. Cieto. Onorevole, Ospedale. Umore. Importante. VOCABULARY. To live Logic . . Monument To produce Productive Reply . . To scold . Study . . Sympathy While . . While (in a) Vivere» Logica. Monumento, Produrre. Produttivo, Risposia. Sgridare. Studiare. Simpatia. Mentre. In poco tempo EXERCISE XXVII. Is it not better to die a man than to live a coward ? I can- not answer such a question. Are you disposed to be a coward? No, I am not disposed to be a coward, but I know that he is the most cowardly who is the least disposed to live? Is your brother as rich as my uncle? No, your brother is richer than my uncle ; but my friend William is the richest merchant (that) we have. Who is happy? He who has no remorse. And who is the most happy ? The man who lives in a world of sympathy. I cannot deny that you have a good horse ; but mine is better than yours, and my brother's is the best of all. The poor man is often more happy than the rich. I believe it ; but why so ? Because he has fewer wants than the rich. How does my sister pronounce French ? Very well. The earth is smaller than the sun, but it is not so small as the moon. As we cannot make the world as we wish, let us conform to the world in which we live. Those who work the most, often gain the least. The man who lives in society is bound to produce at least as much as he con- sumes. The study of languages is very useful, because the lan- guage of a nation is the most important monument of its his- tory. What is the matter with you ? Notliing is the matter with mo ; you see that I am very well, but I have been scolding my friend. Who is that woman ? She is my mother's dress- maker, lie who is generous is always a good man ; but ho who is ignorant is always ignorant. Then ho who is learned is always learned. On the contrary, ho who is learned is often Tory ignorant. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 95 LESSON XXIX. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, continued, 213. The Possessive Pronoun is often omitted when the noun which follows it has reference to the subject; as, Mettetevi la mano al cuore. Put your hand on your heart. 214. The possessive pronouns minej thine, etc., which in English follow the noun with a preposi- tion, precede it in Italian without the preposition; as, Questo into amico This friend of mine. Un vostro parente .... A relation of yours. 215. Possessive pronouns, used substantively in the singular, signify one's property ; in the plural they stand for friends, folloioers, relatives', as, lo spendo il mio. I spend my property. Come stanno i vostri ? How are your friends ? Quando i miei viddero il nemico. When my (soldiers) saw the Vassalirono. enemy they assaulted him. 216. Possessive pronouns relating to a noun before mentioned take no article, if we wish only to mark possession ; as, Questo cavallo e mio, ed e il mio che corre il piU. . This horse is mine, and it is mine that runs the swiftest. 217. To avoid ambiguity, suo and sua are changed into di lui and di lei, when they do not relate to the subject of the proposition ; as, E(/li ha il libro di lui. He has his book. N. B. — Egli ha il suo libro would signify his own book. 96 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 218. Instead of the possessive pronouns, conjuno live pronouns are used with nouns which refer to the limbs of the body, or a part of one's dress: as, JUi ruppi il braccio .... I broke my arm. Si iaglio il diio He cut his finger. Vi bruciaste V abiio . . . You have burnt your coat. Gli tagliarono la testa . . . They cut off his head. N. B. — Several other expressions are so used for anabgy ; as, Egli non gli e padre, or egli non e suo padre. He is not his father. 219. The gerund, which in Enghsh follows the possessive pronoun, as my being, his loriting, is expressed in Italian by the infinitive with the definite article ; the possessive pronoun is then changed into the corresponding personal pronoun in the nominative, and placed after the verb ; as, iy' esser io . . . My being . , . Lo scriver vol . . . Vour writing . . i' avir egli scriito . . . His having written . . . 220. As the verb must (bisognare) is impersonal in Italian, a change of construction in the phrase is necessary. The sentence should begin with the verb must, bisogna, followed by the conjunction c7ie, and the subject of must should be placed before the following verb, which is used in the subjunctive ; as, Bisogna che Guglielmo scriva una lettera. William must write a letter. Bisogna che io vada alia scuola. I must go to school. N. B. — This expression is the same as the use of It is necessary, in English ; as, It is necessary that I should go. Observatio.v. — If the subject be a pronoun, the sentence may bo expressed as in English, with the change of the personal pronoun into a conjunctive pronoun ; as, Mi bisogna andare alia scuola. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 97 VOCABULARY. Affectation . . AJfeitazione. To put . . . Mettere. Coachman . . Cocchicre. To present . . Fresentare. Etiquette . . . Etichetla. Properly . . Propriamente. Familiar . . . Familiare. To repeat . . Ripeiere. Generally . . . Generalinente. Superior . . Superiore. Lackey . . . . Lacche. To take off . . Tot/Here. Memorial . . . Siipplica. Term . . . . Tennine. Nobleman . . JVobile. To tremble . . Tremare. To omit . . . metier e. Various . . , . Vario. Patience . . . Pazienza. Wife . . . . Moylie. EXERCISE XXVIII. Good-morning, madam. Good-morning, sir. How do you do? I am very well, I thank you. How is your daughter? She is very well. Where is she? "She is at my father's to-day. Whose pencil is this ? It is mine. Is yours better than mine ? I do not know. How much did you pay for yours ? A dollar and a half. And I paid twice as much (the double) for mine. Three dollars? Certainly. My pencil is three times better thaji yours. What is the matter with your friend? He has lost all his property, and is now in great trouble. Has he not a rich father ? Yes, but he wishes to be independent. Put on your gloves and take off your hat. Who is that man ? He is a brother of mine. How many brothers have you ? Only one. Why do you not say he is my brother ? Because I can say he is a brother of mine even when I have but one brother. I think that this is a mistake. No, this is not a mistake. Well, can you say this is a wife of mine? I don't . . . No, I cannot. Then you cannot properly say a brother of mine, when you have but one brother. Is it true that the Italians and French always say Mister, Madam, and Miss, before mother, father, and sister ? I'^es, they generally do (say so), but this etiquette is omitted when they are on familiar terms, or when they speak of their own friends to a superior, because in such cases it would be affected. A certain nobleman who had lost his property went once to pre- sent a petition to the Prince of Conde, and began to repeat Mis- ter my father, and Madam my mother, so many times, that the Prince lost his patience, and, calling his servant, he said, " Mister my lackey, say to Mister my coachman to put Messrs. my horses to Madam my coach." 98 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. LESSON XXX. USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 221. Any verb expressing doubt, such as pregare^ temere, duhitare, sperare, or any conditional proposi- tion which conveys to the mind the idea of a thing not yet accomplished, and which may be fulfilled or not, according to circumstances, if followed by the conjunction cJie, that, governs the following verb in the subjunctive. 222. The subjunctive verb is put in the present if the verb of the principal proposition be in the present or future ; in any other case, it is put in the imperfect; as, Temo die il mio amico parta I fear that my friend will leave senza vedermi. without seeing me. Temeva che mio fratello pariisse I feared that my brother would senza vedermi. leave without seeing me. Remark. — It is not the word preceding the verb, but the spirit, the intention, the object we have in view, which determine the proper use of the subjunctive. Thus, if we wish to express more or less cer tainty or doubt, we may say, Credo che egli e ammalatOy or ^ _ , ,, , . , . _ . . , . . , ^ ?■ 1 believe that he is sick. Credo che egli sia ammalato. ) Credo che egli e arrivatOy or ^ ^ , ,. ^, ^^ , , . , _,,,,.. . , ^ I believe that he has arrived. Credo che egli sia arrivato. ) fl.nd we would say, Credo che Dio I il Creatore delV uiiiverso, and not che sia . . . I believe that God is the Creator of the universe. 223. As the subjunctive mood is used to express the idea of anything which is conditional, or not yet accomplished, so the future may be used instead of USE OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 99 the present subjunctive, and the conditional instead of the imperfect subjunctive ; as, Temo che e<;li parta, or pariira senza vcdermi. Tcineva che Cffli partisse, or pariirebbe senza vedermi. N. B. — The conjunction che is sometimes elegantly suppressed after verbs implying doubt, fear, hope, in the same way that that is suppressed in English ; as, Dubito me lo avesse fatlo apposta. I suspect he did it to me on purpose. Spero mi accogliera cordialmenie. I hope he will receive me cordially. Temo mi faccia aspettare molto. I fear he will make me wait long. 224. The conjunction se, if, though of a condi- tional nature, is followed by the indicative, if the prevailing idea is positive ; as, Se parlo piano, e perche non posso parlar forte. If I speak low, it is jDecause I cannot speak loud. Se ballava ogni ffiorno, era perche mi vi forzavano. If I danced every day, it was because they forced me to it. Partiro domani, se potro. I shall leave to-morrow, if I can. But, if a doubt prevails, the subjunctive is used ; as, Parlerei forte, se potessi . . I would speak loud, if I could. Sarei malato, se ballassi . . I should be sick, if I danced. Partirei, se potessi .... I would leave, if I could. 225. When futurity is implied, the verb following se must be in the future, and not in the present, as in English ; as, Gli scrivero, se voi gli scriverete. I will write to him, if you will write to him. N. B. — The present tense may be employed as in English, if allu •ion is made to the present time ; as, Gli scrivero, se mi date il consenso. I will write to liim, if you give me leave. 100 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 226. When se lias the meaning of whether, the. subjunctive may be used or not ; as, Sepiange o ride \^^^^ viHmporta.i^^^^^^^ ^® ^®®P^ ^^ laughs, it Se pianga o rida J I makes no diflerence to me. 227. Impersonal verbs require the following verb in the subjunctive, if the sentence is in the plural ; in the subjunctive or infinitive, if the sentence is in the singular J as, JBasta che si faccino vederCy or basta farsi vedere. It is enough that they make themselves seen. 228. A relative superlative followed by che takes the verb in the subjunctive ; as, Egli e il piu felice uomo che to conosca. He is the most happy man that I am acquainted with. 229. The subjunctive is also used after the con- junctions and adverbs which express a conditional idea, such as quantunque, bencMj purche, fincM, accioccM, quand'anche; as, Benche mi creda Although he believes me. Pur che m* ami Provided he loves me. . J^" Notwithstanding this, Tasso makes Sophronia say : Benche ne furto e il mio^ ne ladra io sono. Although mine is not a theft, nor am I a robber. EXAMPLES. How does he know it ? Come lo sa ? [s he acquainted with that man? Conosce egli qucW uomo ? Does he know his lesson? Sa egli la sua Iczione ? In good plain French. In buon chiaro Francese. I hope he will write to me. Spero mi scrivera. He is not ill, yet he takes some Egli noneammalato, pure prendt medicine every morning. delle medicine ogni mattina. My business docs not permit me / mici affari non mi permettono to do so. di farlo. USE OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 101 VOCABULARY. To address . . . Indirizzare. AlFair, business . Affare. To be acquainted . Conosccre. Cottage .... Capanna. Clear Chiaro. Comedy .... Commedia. To conjecture . . Cony ettur are. Deep Profondo. Fashion .... Mo'da. Free Libero. Foreigner Forestiere. Last Ultimo. Late Tardi. To laugh Rider e. Learning Dottrina Presence Presenza To protect .... Proteggere Remedy Rimedio. To suspect .... Sospettare. To take Prendere. EXERCISE XXIX. Are you acquainted with that man ? No, I do not know who he is. It appears that he does not know where to go. I think tiiat he is a foreigner. No, I know that he is not a foreigner. How do you know (it) ? Suspecting that he was a Frenchman, 1 addressed him a few words in French, and he laughed, and laughed, and finally he said, in good plain English, " I guess not." Then he is a Yankee. Have you dined? No, sir ; we dine at five o'clock. I wish that you would dine with us to-day. I thank you, but I cannot, because my presence is indispensable at my father's. Then we shall be happy to see you to-night. I will try to come, if eight o'clock is not too late. You must come, whether it be late or not. Very well. How is your brother? He is ill. If he is a physician, why does he not take some medicine ? He never takes any medicine ; physicians never take medicine. Have you been at my brother's? No, but I shall go to-morrow, if my friend will lend me his horse. Is it not better to go now ? VTell, I will go now, if you will go with me. I cannot leave my business, but I will be at »your service to-night. At what time? At eight o'clock. Very w^ell ; but, no, I cannot go to-night ; I must go to a concert at half past eeven. That man speaks a great deal, but says nothing. Where are you going ? I must go to see my father. Is he at home ? I do not know whether he is at home. If you are not sure that he is at home, why do you go there ? I must go to my father's house, whether he is at home or not. Have you spoken to that man? I have not yet spoken to him, but I shall speak to him to-morrow at my brother's store. IQ;2 . , , ^ P^ST • .PARTICIPLE. LESSON XXXI PAST PARTICIPLE. 230. A Past Participle, without the auxiliary verb, agrees with the noun it modifies; as, 77 libro leito The book read. I libri letti The books read. La casa eretta The house erected. Le case erette The houses erected. 231. A past participle employed with the auxil- iary verb avere never changes its termination to adapt itself to the subject ; as, lo ho scritto I have written. Essa ha scritto She has written. Essi hanno scritto They have written. 232. It may agree, or not, with the object which precedes it. If we wish to make prominent the action expressed by the past participle, it remains invariable; as,* Quanti dolori ho sofferto ! How many griefs have I endured ! If we wish to give particular attention to the object, the past participle is then used as an adjec- tive, and must agree with the object ; as, Quanti dolori ho sqfferti! How many griefs have I endured ! In the first case, the mind is occupied with the intensity of suffering ; in the second, with the many pains suffered. 233. According to this rule, the past participle must agree with the pronouns ilj lo, la, le, and ne PAST PARTICIPLE. 103 because they represent the dominant idea of the phrase ; aS; Avete scritto Ic leitere ? . . , Have you written the letters ? lo le ho ffia scritte I have already written them. N. B. — This agreement, however, does not take place if the direct object belongs to a verb which follows the past participle ; as, Li ahbiamo comprati, ma non li abbiamo potato leggere. We have bought them, but we have not been able to read them. 234. A past participle, joined to the verb esserey is used as an adjective, and must agree with the sub- ject or the object. It agrees with the subject when the subject is in the plural and the object in the singular ; as, Le mie sorelle si son comprate una carrozza. My sisters have bought a coach for themselves. It agrees with the object when the object and the subject are in the plural ; as, Le mie sorelle si son comprati i cavalli. My sisters have bought the horses for themselves. If the subject be in the singular, the past participle maj agree with the subject or the object ; as, Eyli si e tolto i guantiy or ^ _ , , , ^ , . , „,...,,,.. , . ?- lie has taken off his gloves. E(/li SI e tolti I guanti. ) ° 235. The verb /are, used reflectively, is followed by the infinitive, and not by a past participle, as in Enghsh; as, Essa si fa odiare da iutti. She makes herself hated by everybody. 236. The present participle of the auxiliary verbs is often elegantly omitted ; as, Scritia la letterat mi addormeniai. Having written the letter, I fell asleep. 1^" If a conjunctive pronoun had been joined to the present par- ticiple which is omitted, it must be afi&xed to the past participle ; aa, Scrittala mi addormentai. Having written it, I fell asleep. 104 PAST PARTICIPLE. VOCABULARY. Arm Braccio. To adopt Adottare. To beat Battere. Brief Breve. Dialogue Dialoyo. Eye Occhio. To finish Finire. Fury Furia. To hold Tenere. Husband Marito. Ill-treat To invent Invention . Plant . Poet . . Method . To rave Side . . Simple . Thorn . Maltrattare. hiventare. Invenzione. Pianta. Poeta. Metodo. Vaneggiarc Lata. Semplice. Spi?ia. EXERCISE XXX. Have you written your translation? My translation has been written and copied twice. To whom did you give my let- ters? I gave them to your sister. Did she read them? She had not read them when I left her. Have you found the books? I "have found them. I thought they were lost. No, they are not lost ; my sister loaned them to her friend. Has not your friend finished them ? Not all ; she has finished the first and second volume. How many songs have you sung? Only three ; but the first two have been sung twice. Have you read many books? I have read twenty-one. Twenty-one books? Yes, twenty-one ; what a wonder ! In how many days ? In two days and a half. How have you been able to read them in so short a time ? I have adopted the new method of reading books. I cannot believe that a new method has been invented for read- ing. Yes, there is one ; and it is already adopted by many per- sons. What is it? It is to read by steam. A fine invention, indeed ; you rave, my dear. " How could you marry your daughter to an enemy of yours? " said John to William. " It was to revenge myself," answered AYilliam. After a few months, the daughter, who had been ill-treated by her husband, went to her father, saying that her husband had beat her ; at which, the father, in great anger, gave her another blow, saying, " Tell your husband that if he has beaten my daughter, I have beaten his wife." Are you thirsty ? No, sir ; I am not thirsty. Are you hungry? A little. What shall I give you? Give me what you like. Shall I give you some bread and butter ? I will ftscept it with pleasure. FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 105 LESSON XXXII FORMATION OF THE PLURAL, continued. 237. Nouns ending in io, preceded by a vowel, or by c, g, Jij gl, drop the o in the plural ; as, Calzolaio . . Shoemaker. Calzolai . . Shoemakers. Arancio . . . Orange-tree. Aranci . . . Orange-trees. Raggio . . . Ray. Raggi . . . Rays. Occhio . . . Eye. Occhi . . Eyes. Figlio . . . . Son. Figli, . . Sons. 238. If the termination io is preceded by any other consonant, the o is changed into i; as, ZiOy uncle. Zii, uncles. | Pendio, declivity. Pendii, declivities. 239. Dissyllabic nouns ending in co and go insert an h in the plural, in order to preserve the hard sound of the c and g ; as, FuocOy fire. Fuochi^ fires. | Logo, lake. Laghi, lakes. Exceptions. — Greco, a Greek ; mago,* a "wise man ; porcoy a swine, which make Greci, magi, porci. 240. Polysyllabic nouns ending in co and go insert the h only when this termination is preceded by a consonant ; as, Albergo, inn. Alberghi, inns. | Obelisco, obelisk. Obelischi, obelisks, Exceptioxs. — Castigo, punishment; obligo, obligation; dialogo, dialogue, which make castighi, oblighi, dialoghi. (N. B. — See list of nouns which have the h, though co and go are i)receded by a vowel, page 224.) 241. Some of the polysyllabic nouns take or reject the A. (For a list of such nouns, see page 223.) * Mago, a magician, has maghi in the pluraL 106 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 24i. The following nouns, which are masculine in the singular, become feminine in the plural : Singular. Plural. Cantaio .... A weight Cantata. Centinaio ... A hundred . . . Centinaia. Migliaio ... A thousand .... Migliaia. Miglio .... A mile Miylia. Moggio .... A measure .... Moggia. Paio A pair Paia. Staio A bushel Staia. Uovo An egg Uova. 243. Some masculine nouns ending in o have two plurals, one in ^, masculine, and one in a, femi- nine ; as, LabbrOy lip, (plural) labbri and labbra. DitOy finger, «' diti *' dita. N. B. — The preference is given to the plural in a. (See list of such nouns, page 224.) 244. Some masculine nouns have a masculine or feminine plural, according to their meaning : MurOy a wall; muray (of a city); muriy (of a house). , , , fa member, , (limbs of the . . (members of an •^^^^^' 1 a limb ; '^"^^'^^ { body ; ^^'^^^riy^^ assembly. fhorns of an _„„„,• /musical in- \ animal ; * \ struments. (dessert, at frutH, fruits. ( table ; (sticks of leani /conveyance, t wood; ^ I carriageB. laughter ; risiy rice. CornOy Frutto, LegnOy RisOf limb; '""""-"' horn.: corna, fruit ; wood ; fruitay legnay EXAMPLES. He is always weeping. What makes him say so ? The vivifying light of the sun. Have you many fruit-trees in your garden ? Egli nonfa altro che piangere. Che cosa glifa dir cosi ? La luce vivijicante del sole. Avete voi molti albeti fruitifert nel vostro giardino ? FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 107 Cl^erry . . To compare Couditiou To dim . . Dimension Inflexible . Knee . . Light . . To move . Nevertheless, stUl VOCABULARY. Cirieggia. Cotnparare. Condizione. ^ppatmare. JJimenzione. Injlessibile, Ginocchio. Luce. Muovere. JVulladimeno. Omnipotent Peach . Place . Prodigal Ray . . Scarcely Step . . Tear . . To remember Vivifying . . Onnipotente* Pesca. PostOy luoga, Prodigo. Raggio. Appena. Passo. Lagrima. Ramineniare. Vivijicante. EXERCISE XXXI. Where are your sons? They are in the garden. In whosa garden ? In my brother's garden. Are there many fruit-trees in your brother's garden ? Not many. Has he many cherries ? Yes, he has many cherries and peaches, though he has only five cherry-trees and six peach-trees. How is your mother ? The- same ; she can scarcely move her limbs ; her knees are always trembling, and her arms are always stiff. Has she not two phy- sicians? Yes, she has two physicians, and they are very prodi- gal in counsels and remedies ; but, nevertheless, she is always in the same condition. How many miles is it (are there) from your father's garden to my brother's house? How many miles? Why do you not say, " How many hundreds of thousands of miles ? ' ' Why so ? Because the distance is only a few steps ; a quarter of a mile, I believe. Have you any looking-glasses ? Yes, sir ; I have a great many looking-glasses. My uncles are desirous to have a looking-glass, but they did not give me the dimensions. Have you studied your lesson ? I have studied it, but I do not know the dialogues. Are they long ? They are long, and in some places very diflBcult. Have you much time for your Italian lesson ? I have but a few minutes for my Italian lesson. How much did these two books cost ? Twenty-five francs. Who would pay twenty-five francs for two old books ? They are not old books, sir. What makes you think that they are old books ? Because they were printed in the year one thou- sand six hundred and forty-one. I hope that you will remem- ber the difference between old books and ancient books, and that many things are ancient without being old. 108 AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. LESSON XXXIII AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 245. The Italians modify the signification of nouns by additional terminations. Grammarians have but increased the difficulty of properly using the augmentatives and diminutives by a multi- plicity of terminations, to each of which they have endeavored to give a special meaning. Practice and familiarity with Italian writers is the only guide to their use ; yet, as a general rule, 1. By changing the last vowel of a noun, an adjective, or an adverb, into one, its meaning is augmented; as, Libro ... A book. Librone ... A big book. Tavola . . A table. Tavolone . . A big table. Furbo . . A cheat. Furbone ... A great cheat. Bene . . . AVell. Benone ... Very well. 2. By changing the last vowel into accio for the masculine, and accia for the feminine, to the mean- ing of bigness is added that of ugliness ; as, Uomo . . A man. * Uomaccio . A corpulent, ugly man. Camera . A room. Cameraccv . A large, ugly-looking room. . i^" All words ending in ce and ge take an i before the termina- tion of the augmentative, to preserve the soft sound ; as, „ . (Vocione, a strong, loud, manly voice. Foce, voice. < ^^ . . , , ,. n • ( Vociaccuiy a bad, disagreeable voice. 3. By changing the last vowel into etto or ino for the masculine, and etta or ina for the feminine, a generally pleasing idea of smallness is conveyed. AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 109 occasionally accompanied by expressions of praise, sympathy, or flattery ; as, Libro . . . Book. Libretto . A pretty little book. Mano . . . Hand. Manina . A pretty little hand. Povero ... A poor man. Povcrino (expresses sympathy). 246. The two terminations etto and ino, or etta and ina, are often joined together ; as, Pezzettino , A very little piece. Tavolinetio A very little table. Boccheitina A very little mouth. Marianninctta Pretty little Mary Ann. N. B. — Many words end in the above terminations without being augmentatives or diminutives ; as, Canavaccio, towel. Bastone, stick. Borraccia, leather bottle. JlrchitettOf architect. BracciOy arm. Magazzino^ warehouse. B.EMARK. — The use of the augmentatives and diminutives should be limited to those words which practice and experience have rendered familiar. In case of doubt, it is better to foi^m the augmentative regularly, as in English. Thus : from fool, mattOy to express a great fool, say un gran matto ; because in this case mattoney instead of meaning a great fool, means a brick. EXAMPLES. Take of it as much as you like. Prendetene quanto vi piace. Go and speak to that man. Andate a parlare a quelV uomo. Little Mary has sung a little Marietta ha cantato una can- song, zoncina. She has a charming pretty little Essa ha un* incantevole bocchet^ mouth, a beautiful little hand, iinayUna bella manina^ e gru' and small, pretty feet. ziosi piedini. Your sister's affectation has no Z«' affettazione di vostra sorella limit. non ha limiti. I thank you, sir. Grazie, signore^ or vi ringrazio. Be attentive, and do not lose your Siate attento, e non perdete la patience. pazienza. 'y and my friend are on familiar lo ed il mio amico siamo in ier- terms. mini familiari. no AUGMENTATIVES AKT) DIMINUTIVES. VOCABULARY. Anger . . . Basket . . Bell. . . . To bereave . Bulwark . . Eye-witness Foot. . . . Mary . . . Music . . . Rabbia. Canestro. Campana. Abbandonare. Baluardo. Testimonio ocular e. Piede. Maria. Musica. Path . . To permit Pi'ophet lliver To walk Week. . To weep Witness . Worthy . . Sentiero. . Permetiere. . Prof eta. . Fiume. . Camminare. . Settimana. . Piangere. . Testimonio. . Meritevole. EXERCISE XXXII. Who is that lovely little creature ? She is my little niece. How old is she ? She is only seven years old. What is her name? Mary. Little Mary, have you studied music? Yes, sir. Will you sing a little song ? I cannot sing, sir. Can you play ? I can play a very little, but my teacher does not allow me to sing. Will you give me a little piece of paper ? You can take as much paper as you like. Where shall I find it ? You will find it on the little table in my study. How do you do to-day? I am extremely well, I thank you. IIow is your nephew ? He is pretty well. How much did you pay tor that Dook ? Two dollars and a half. Two dollars and a half for that ugly little book ! It is a good-sized book, and not an ugly- looking book. Where shall I put these flowers ? Put them in that little basket. What shall I do now ? Ring the little bell, and go and study your lesson in William's room. I do not like to go to that ugly little room. Go in my little room, then. How many men often say of a pretty woman, " What a lovely little creature ! 0, the beautiful little hands ! 0, the charming little mouth ! What a pretty little foot ! " But how few per- sons say, "Is she truly the little angel she appears to be? Have those pretty little hands always been useful ? Has that charming little mouth ever spoken two sweet little words to the bereaved widow, to the poor and the sick ? Is that pretty little foot always walking in the riglit path of honor and virtue ? " The poets compare two beautiful eyes to two bright stars ; for- getting that the stars are always sparkling with heavenly light, and speak always of the glory of the Omnipotent, whilst the most beautiful eyes are often dimmed with tears and sorrow. ADVERBS. Ill LESSON XXXIV. ADVERBS. 247. The Adverbs are generally formed by add iug mente to the feminine adjective ; as, Generosa . . Generous. Generosamenie . . Generously Cortese . . . Polite. Corieseinenie . . . Politely. 248. Adjectives ending in le and re drop the final e; as, Facile .... Easy. Facilmenie . . . Easily. Regolare . . . Regular. Regolarmenie . . Regularly. S^° Some adjectives are used as adverbs without the additional mente ; as, poco, molto, forte, piano. Remark. — When the above words modify a noun, they are adjec- tives ; when they modify a verb, they are adverbs ; as, lo ho siudiato molto I have studied much. lo ho molto pane I have much bread. 249. Adverbs in a superlative degree are formed by adding mente to the feminine superlative j as, Co rtesissima , coriesissim amente. Generosissima , generosissimamente. OBSERVATIONS ON SOME OF THE ADVERBS. JVb, non . . . No. Si Yes. Maiy giammai . Never. Gia Already. Bene WeU. Punto\ Mica J AtaU. ^vanti\ Prima) Dopo . . Qui, qua . Li, la, cola Costl, costa Ami che no Before. After. Here. There. There. Rather. 112 ADVERBS. 250. No stands by itself; non is used to form a negative sentence ; as, JVoy non posso permeitarlo. No, I cannot allow it. 251. No and si following a verb in the same sen- tence are preceded by di; as, Penso di si I think so. Egli mi disse di no He told me no, Ed egli mi disse " no^ nol faro.''^ And he said to me, " No, I will not do it." N. B. — JVon lo makes nol, when followed by a verb not com- aiencing with a vowel, z, or s impure. 252. The adjective or participle which in English follows rather J anzi die no, in Italian precedes it, or is placed between anzi and cJie no ; as, Amabile anzi che no, or | ^,^^^^^ ^^^.^^^^ Anzi amabile che no. ) 253. Mai and giammai are used with non except when they answer a question for themselves ; as, JVbn /' ho mai vista. Mai ? JVo, giammai. I have never seen her. Never ? No, never. ^^Mai and giammai in interrogative sentences, and in conditional or doubtful phrases, are used without non, and stand for ever ; as, Se mai la vedessi If ever I could see her. i' avete mai veduta? .... Have you ever seen her? 254. Gid, bene, punto, mica, are often used as expletives ; as, JVon e mica da scherzo . . . It is not a thing to joke about. JVon gia che Z' ami .... Not that I love her. 255. Prima and dopo are generally followed by di y as. Prima di me. Before mc. Dopo di vol. After you, Dopo del tempo prefisso. After the appointed time. ADVEliUS. 113 256. The use of the adverbs prima and avanti requires particular attention. Prima is an adverb implying thne. Avanti implies locality ; as, JSffli venne prima deW ora pre- lie came before the appointed fissa. hour. Eyli frese posto avanti di me. He took a seat before me. 257. Costa and costi point to the place of the person spoken to. 258. Lij Idj and coldj point to a place distant both from the speaker or writer and from the per- son spoken to. 259. Qulj U, costi, are more definite than qud^ Idy costd ; as, E(/li sara qui doniani. He will be here to-morrow ; i. e., in this house. ^ E(/li sara qua domani. He will be here to-morrow ; i. No one. With their irregular feminines, but no plural. Invariable. J\riuno Taluno . Such a one, Qualcuno . Some one ^^* I" With the regular feminine and plurals. 261. Altri is used only in the nominative ; in the objective it makes altrui, which in the genitive and dative is often used without a preposition. In the genitive it often precedes the noun ; as, JVe voi ne altri sapra convincermi. Neither you nor others can convince me. JVon fare altrui cio che per te nan vuoi. Do not do to others that which you do not wi^ for yourself jL' altrui bonta mi guida. The goodness of others guides me. 262. L^altrui signifies the property of others ; as, JVb» appropriarli r altrui. Do not appropriate to yourself the property of others. 116 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 263. Chi, preceded by non, stands for no 07ie, and takes the subjunctive ; as, Trovo chi lo fece . . She found some one who did it. JSTon trova chi V ami . She does not find any one who loves her. C^' Chi may be often repeated without oflending the ear ; as, Chi saliva, chi scendeva, chi cantava, e chi ballava. Some ascended, some descended, some sang, and some danced. ' 264. Altri and cJii are often used in a distributive sense ; as, Altri nuotava, altri affondava. Some swam, others sank. A chi piace la toga a chi la The toga pleases some, and some spada. the sword. 265. Tutti takes the verb in the plural ; as, Tuiti lo dicono. Everybody says so. 266. Si is used with a verb in the singular, and when followed by the pronoun ne, the i is changed into e; as, ,Che si dice del mio cavallo ? . What do they say of my horse ? JVon se ne dice nulla .... They say nothing about it. 267. Chicchessia and cJiisivoglia take the verb in the subjunctive, with the conjunction che; as, Chicchessia che vengay dite che dormo. Whoever mr.y come, say that I am asleep. 268. Veruno, nessuno, and niunOj following a verb, take non before them ; as, JVesstmo lo sa, or ) ^.^ , ,^ , ^ No one knows it JYon lo sa nessuno. ) Remark. — tn an interrogative sentence, vcrutio, nessu7i0y and niuno, stand for anybody ; as, JVbn vedete nessuno ? Do you not see anybody ? N. B. — Vedete nessuno is often used, but in such a case it would be better to say vedete qualcuno. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 117 VOCABULARY. Admiration Calm . . Child . . Coutent . Counsel . To defend Defender . Dreary . . To exalt . Experience Innocent . Aminirazione. Cat mo. Bimbo. Contento. Consiylio. Difendere. Difensore. Lugubre. Esaltare. Esperienza. Iiinoccnte. Liberty, freedom Mercy . . . . . Painful .... Penury. . . . To profit . . . Save, except . To shriek . . . . Similar, like . . Socrates ... Stupid .... Wealthy . . . , To wrong . . . Liberia. Misericordia. Penoso. Penuria. Profittare. Salvo. St rider e. Simile. Socraie. Stupido. Ayiato. Far torto a. EXERCISE XXXIV. In a free country, he who is innocent has nothing to fear. No one is more worthy of profound admiration than Socrates, who was always calm and tranquil, although ho had a capricious wife and stupid children. Happy the man who profits by the experience of others. No one is contented with his situation. Everybody is a good counsellor after misfortune arrives. Who- ever may come, say that I am not at home. Is it not better to say that you do not like to see any one. Do not say so, because it is not always safe to say what one does or thinks. 0, you princes of the earth, who exalt yourselves above your fellow- men, remember that, whoever you may be, there is an Eternal Justice overruling the world, and equalizing the destinies of all, whosoever they may be ! No one is a prophet in his own coun- try ; still, everybody longs for his dear home. If you like to have a good name, be sure never to wrong anybody. Do not reproach me so loud ; speak low, that no one may hear what you say. I wish to say that it is a great sin to wish for the property of others, and that those who are comfortable do not reflect that many others are in penury. The city is in the hands of our enemies ; no one can imagine the distressing scene of which I was an eye-witness : the brave defenders of their coun- try and their freedom are nearly all slain on the bulwark ; and the women and children, — 0, the most mournful sight ! Some wept, some shrieked ; others, pressing their babes in their arms, plunged into the river ; and all prayed the God of mercy and iustice to defend their honor and independence. 118 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. LESSON XXXVI INDEFINITE PRONOUNS USED SUBSTANTIVELY FOR THINGS. 269. The Indehnite Pronouns used substantively for things are as follows : Checche . . . ^ Checchessia . . > Whatever, •whatsoever. Checchesivoglia J PeVf* perquanio . However, however much. JSTulla, niente . . Nothing. Tutto All. 270. Checchessia, checchesivoglia, require che after them; and the verb in the subjunctive. CheccM dispenses with che; as, Checche scriviaie. ^ Checchessia or checchesivoglia che scriviaie.) ^ ^ ^' Checchessia^ besides the meaning of checche, has sia, the pres- ent subjunctive of the verb to be ; consequently it can form a sentence for itself, and when followed by a verb must have the relative pro- noun che connecting the two verbs Thus, the meaning of Chec- chessia che scriviaie is, "Whatever may be the thing which you write. Hence it is that checche is never followed by a noun without a verb ; as, Checche sia il vostro parere. Whatever be your opinion N. B. — The same rule holds good for checchesivoglia. 271. Per is generally followed by an adjective with che, and by the verb in the subjunctive ; as, Per ricco che sia e miserabile. However rich he may be, he is wretched. * "With aij adjective following it. INDEFIMTE TROKOUXS. 119 V However wretched he may be. 272. Ferquanto takes the verb in tlie subjunc- tive, but dispenses with die; as, Perquanto egli sia miserabile. Perquanto miserabile egh sia, 273. Tutto is used with or without the article ; as. So tutto I kuow all. Mi e staio detlo il tutto . All has been told to me. N. B — If a conjunctive pronoun precedes, the article must be used ; as, J\e so il tutto. I know all of it. 274. Nulla and niente are often used for any^ tJiiJig ; as, Volete nierite? Do you* want anything ? Direste nulla m miofavorc ? Would you say anything in my behalf? E dolce far nulla * .... To do something is pleasant. 275. If nulla and niente follow the verb, 7ion is placed before it ; as, A'bn mi hisogna nulla, o^*^ _ , , „ ,^ ,, ... Vl have need of nothing. JVulla mi otsogna. ) ° If they are followed by an adjective, they take the preposition di ; as, »N'ulla di buono Nothing good. JViente di cattivo .... Nothing bad. If they are followed by a verb, they take the prepo- sition da; as, JVulla da fare Nothing to do. JViente da dire Nothing to say. EXAMPLES. What did your brother intend to Che voleva dire, or che aveva in- say? tenzione di dire vostrofratello? My brother intended to say that Mio fratcllo voleva dire che egli he cannot come to-night. non pub venire stasera. i will never fail to do so. lo non manchero^mai di farlo. " The meaning of this expression is, " It is sweet to do sometliing," and not, aa is sometimes supposed, " It is sweet to do nothing." In order to give the latter meaning, it would require the negative non before the verb. 120 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS VOCABULARY Ancestor . . . Antenato. To hide . . . Occultare, To acquire . . Acquistare. Impatient . . Jmpaziente. Brute . . . . Bruto. In spite cf . . A dispetto dt To conceal . . JVascondere. Laconism . . . . Laconismo. . Cynic . . . . Cinico. To obtain . . . Ottenere. Disagreeable . Disaggradevole. Package . . . Involto. llducation . . Educazione. Pedant . . . . Pcdante. To exile . . . Esiliare. Philosopher . . Filosofo. Exile . . . . Esule. Position . . . . Posizione. Eorehead . . . Fronte. To scrutinize . Scrutinare. EXERCISE XXXV. What has that man given you ? He has not given me any- thing — Whatever you may say, I cannot believe it, because I saw that he gave you a package, and you put it in your pocket. Yes, he gave me something. Then why did you say that he did not give you anything? But you are always impatient, and do not allow me to finish what I have commenced ; I intended to say that he had not given me anything belonging to you. Shall I do anything for you, sir? Not anything at present, I thank you. Have you read that letter which was sent to a gentleman by his wife? No, I have not read it. It is here : " Having nothing to do, I write ; and having nothing to say, I finish." It is truly a model of laconism ; nothing more simple than this. Is not that woman very beautiful ? Beautiful as she is, she is not gentle. Whatever you may think of her, she is the belle of the evening. Do you know what your boy has done? I know all, but what can I do ? True merit cannot be concealed, whatever you may do to hide it. What have you done to-day? Nothing good. And nothing bad, I hope. I have not done anything, either good or bad. A man exiled from his country, wliatever be the reason of his banishment, or whatever bo the position he has obtained, will never fail to long for the land of his forefathers. Without a good education, the learned man is but a pedant, the philosopher a cynic, the soldier a brute, and every man, whatever he may bo, a very disagreeable person. How is the weather to-day? It is very warm to-day. Was it warm yesterday? No, sir ; yesterday was not so warm fte to-day. 1^'DEFJAITE rKONUlWS. llii LESSON XXXVII. With their regular feminine but no plural. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS USED SUBSTANTIYELY FOR PERSONS AND THINGS. 276. The Indefinite Pronouns used substantively for persons and things are as follows : Uno One. Altro Another. CiascunOf ciascheduno . Each one. Qualcuno, qualcheduno . Some one. Taluno Some one. Ognuno Every one. . Tale Such an one. ■^ ^ , ,, -, .., ., _ , « ,, For both genders, with the Quale Some, others. > i i i Coiale Such an one. JSP* 277. Altro, repeated in the same sentence, signi- fies the first time, one tiling, the second time, another j as, Altro e parlar di morte ; altro e morire. It is one thing to speak of death ; it is another to die. 278. Alt7'o stands for anything else; as, Volete altro ? . . . . Do you wish anything else ? JVon so altro .... I know nothing else. 279. Altro is sometimes used with the definite article; as, L^uno disse di si, Valtro disse di no. The one said yes, the other said no. 280. L'uno, Valtro, in the nominative, take the verb in the singular, if connected with the conjunc- tion e; as, L^uno e Valtro parla di voi. Both speak of you. 122 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 281. In the objective the preposition accom- panying Vuno must be repeated with Valtro ; as, Parlai alV uno ed aW altro. I spoke to the one and (to) the other. Scrissi all' una ed all* altra. I wrote to the one and (to) the other. 282. Per altro signifies as for the rest; as, Egli e riservato ; per altro, e sincero. He is reserved ; as for the rest, he is sincere. 283. Senz^ altro stands for undoubtedly ; as, Egli verra, senz* altro. He will come, undoubtedly. EXAAIPLES. How do you like this translation ? Come vi place questa iraduziofie f I do not like it much. JVon mi place molto. Have I anything else to do ? Ho io altro da fare ? You have nothing else to do. Vol non avete nienV altro da fart, I am very glad of it. JVe sono contentissimo. SONETTO DEL PETRACA. Solo e pensoso i piii deserti campi Vo misurando a passi tardi o lenti, E gli occhi porto per fuggire intenti Dove vestigio uman I'arena stampi. Altro schermo non trovo che mi scampi Dal manifesto accorger de le genti : Perche negli atti di allegrezza spenti, Di fuor si legge, com' io dentro avvampi Si ch'io credo omai, che monti e piagge, E fiumi e selve sappian di che tempre Sia la mia vita, ch' e celata altrui. Ma pur si aspro vio, ne 8\ selvagge Cercar non so, clie amor non venga sempre Ragionando con meco, ed io con lui. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. VS. VOCABULARY. To accommodate To act . . Author . Base . . To be born DitFereuce y-ss . • . Elevated . To enclose Historian Accommodarsi. Aijire. Alitor c. Basso. JVasce.re. Differenza. Uovo. Elevato. Acchiudere. Storico. Idleness Ozio, Linen Tela. Note Biylietto. Objection .... Oyyezione. To return .... Ritornare. Sensation .... Sensazwne Style Stile. Subject Sogycllo. Tender . . . . J^enero. "Writer . . . Scrittore. EXERCISE XXXVI. AV'ho has »een here ? Two of your friends : one of them left this letter for you , the other said that he would return to-night. I have been reading the two books which you sent me yesterday. I find that one is very good, and the other is good for nothing, tliough both are from the same author. Why do you not like the latter ? Because the style is too elevated for the subject. I do not like the book much. Well, it is one thing to say that you do not like it much, and another that the book is good for nothing. Have you sent the letter to my friends ? No, I wrote it last night, but I have not sent it yet. Will you enclose this note ? Yes, with pleasure. Is there anything (else) that I can do? Nothing else, I thank you. What is the time now? Half past twelve. What time did your brother say that he would be here ? He said that he would be here after twelve. AYell, it is now half past, and he has not come : it is better not to wait any longer for him. Let us wait until one o'clock ; because, if he said that he would be here after twelve, he will do so, undoubtedly. Have you written to your sisters about Wil- liam and John? Yes, I have already written to the one and to the other of both, but I have not received an answer from either the one or the other. How did you find your friends ? Each of them is in very good health ; and each of their coaches is in very good condition. I am glad of it. Where is my father's cane? It is in his room, in the corner near the door. What»o'clock is it ? It is half past twelve. Is it possible ? At what time do we dine ? We dine at half past two, but on Sun- day we dine at a quarter past one. 124 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. LESSON XXXVIII INDEFINITE PRONOUNS USED ADJECTIV^ELY FOR PERSONS AND THINGS. 284. The Indefinite Pronouns used adjectivelj for persons and things are as follows : Uno One, a, an. Un altro Another. With their regular feminine. Ogyii Every, all. Qualche Some. ^ualunque .... Any, whatever. PiU More. >■ Invariable. So much. Qualsisia \ ^ ^ ^^ whatever, j ^^"^ *^^^^ plurals by adding Alcuno Some. Ciascuno .... Each. Tanio \ Cotanto) ' Jilquanto A little. AUrettanto .... As much. Poco Little. Molto Much. Troppo Too much Tutto All. Certo Certain. Altro Other. With their regular feminine and plurals. Veruno, nessuno JViunOt nullo Tale \ Cotale) }• No one. . . . Such. Parecchi Several. f With the regular feminine ; \ no plural. f For both gendei's, with the \ regular pluraL No singular ; regular plural INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 125 285. The noun which follows ogni and qudlche must bo in the singular. The word Ognissantij All Saint's Day, and the nouns following cardinal numbers, are excepted ; as, lo trovo qualche errore in ogni pagina, I find some errors on every page. lo lo vcdo ogni quaitro giorni. I see him every four days. 286. Qualunque is always followed by a singular noun, but the verb which follows it must be in the singular or plural, according to the subject ; as, Qualunque persona puo farlo . . . Any person can do it. Qualunque sia la rostra ragione . . Whatever be your reason. Qualunque siano le vostre ragioni . Whatever be your reasons. 287. Tutto preceding a noun is followed by the article; as^ Tutto il denaro fu perduto . . All the money was lost. Tutte le donne gridavan forte . All the women cried loudly. 5^° Tutto used after the verb, and referring to the subject, has no article ; as, Erano tutte donne. They were all women. 288. Tutto quanto signifies ' the whole, without exception; as, • Perirono tutii quanti. All perished, without exception. 289. Tutti, followed by the cardinal numbers duCf ire, quattro, takes the conjunctive e; as, Tutti e due Both. Tutti etre All three. Tuttt e quattro All four. 290. Tutti is followed by no preposition in such expressions as these : Tutti voi All of you. Tutti noi All of us. 126 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. VOCABULARY. To adduce . . . To appeal' . . Citizen .... To condescend . Cross Dolorous, painful To employ . . . To excite . . . Grief ..... Interval .... Addurre. Jlpparire. Cittadino. Condiscendere. Croce. Boloroso. Impiegare, Eccitare. Dolore. Intervallo. Knowledge Nonsense . Obligation Occupation To place . Proposal . Sailor . . Valet . . Vessel . . Weeping . Conoscenza, Sproposito. ObbLi(jazion& Occupazione. Piazzarfi Proposta Marinaio. Valletto. Bastimento. Pianto, EXERCISE XXXVII. In a free country every man is a citizen. Is not every man a citizen in every country? No ; under despotism no man is free ; they are all subjects. What is the difference between a citizen and a subject? One is a man, the other is a slave. You have a great many books on the table ; are they all English ? Almost all my books are English, but I have several French romances. Why do you read such romances? Generally speaking, they are not good books ; but mine are all historical romances, arid they cost me only a few dollars. Newton was born the same day that Galileo died : no interval was left between these two great philosophers. If folly were a painful sensation, we should have weeping in every house. Everything is in God, and God is in everything. Every obligation is a duty. Death is the end of all misfortunes. Why did all three of you come? To tell you that the vessel is lost, and (that) the sailors all died, without exception. Every rose has its thorn, and all men their cross. Idleness makes everything appear difficult : let us, then, employ our time in some useful occupation. I cannot comply with y^ur request, whatever be the reason you adduce. All men are more ready to speak than to act. Do not be proud of any success in life. No bad tree produces good fruit. We should place our honor above everything else in the world. A time for everything, and everything at its time. No man, learned as he may be, is able to acquire a perfect knowl- edge of all the secrets and beauties of nature. Envy is the meanest of all passions. Every man lias in himself something which excites the desire of an envious man FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 127 LESSON XXXIX. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 291. Nouns used to represent animated beings form their feminine by changing o into a; as, Gaito, monacOy amicOy make gatia, monacal arnica. 292. Nouns ending in tore form their feminine in trice; as, Attore^ benefattore, make attricef benefattrice. 293. Some of the nouns of animated beings are known by a name peculiar to each sex ; as, Toro . . . Bull. Vacca .... Cow. Montone . Kam. Pecora . . . Ewe. Becco . . He-goat. Capra .... She-goat. Others have but one gender for both sexes. Thus, the mascuhne nouns tordo, corvo, and the feminine nouns viper a J aquila, express both the male and the female. To ascertain the gender, maschio or femiiia is added to the noun ; as, Corvo maschio . . Male crow. Corvo femina . . Female crow. 294. Names of trees end in o, and are masculine, except querela, an oak-tree ; as, Pero, a pear-tree. Pesco, a peach-tree. Cirieggio^ a cherry-tree. By changing the o into a, they become feminine, and express their fruits ; as, pera^ pear. Exceptions. — The following nouns express the fi-uit and the tree : Cedro . . . Citron. Fico . . . Fig. Pistacchio . Pistachio nut. Dattero .... Date. Limone .... Lemon. Porno Apple. 128 FORMATIOJS OF THE FEMININE. Ij^^ JKbcCt the tree, is masouline ; noce, the fruit, is feminine ; as. Un noce, a nut-tree. Una nocey a nut. 295. The following nouns are of either gender: Erede . . Heir or heiress. I A''ipote . . Nephew or niece. Parente . Eelation. | Consorte . . Wife or husband. 296. Some nouns have two terminations for the same gender; as, La veste or vesta, the dress. La canzone or canzona^ the song. Irregular FEnnNiNES. Sartore . . Tailor. Sarta . . Seamstress Re .... King. Regina . Queen. Duca . . . Duke. Duchessa . Duchess: (See list, page 225.) EXAMPLES. I find him everywhere. lo la trovo per ogni dove. How do you like this book ? Come vi piace questo libro ? I like it very much. Mi piace moltissimo. No one would doubt that you are JYessuno dubiterebbe che vox siete a tailor. sarto. How did he like the letter I sent Come glie piaciuta la letter a ch* yesterday ? io gli mandai ieri ? SPERANZA. Perche gli son compagna L' estivo raggio ardonte L' agricoltor non sente ; Suda, ma non si lagna, Deir opra, o del sudor : Con me nel career nero Ragiona 11 prigioniero, Si scorda affanni, e pene, E al suon di sue catena Cantando va talor. FORMATION OP THE FEMININE. 129 VOCABULARY. Attendance . . Scguito. Menagerie . . Menageria. Bearded . . . . Barbuto. To marry . . . Sposare. Chambermaid . . Camerisla. To mean . . . Voter dire. Cyclopedia . . Ciclopcdia. To personify . Personificare, To doubt . . . Dubitare. To reject . . . Rigettare. Despair . . . Disperazionc. Remarkable . . Rimarchevole Everywhere . . Per 0(jni dove. Sense . . . . Senso. Fairy . . . . Fata. Steward . . . Maggiordomo. *nditferent . . . Indiffe rente. To touch . . . Toccare Magic . . . . Ma(/ico. Wand . . . . Verga. EXERCISE XXXVIII. Will you sing me an Italian song ? What shall I sing ? Sing what you like. How do you like my sister's voice ? She has a good voice, and she is a very good singer. Has the dressmaker brought my silk dress ? She has not brought it yet. What did you see in the menagerie? I saw a lion and a lioness, a tiger and a tigress, a peacock and a peahen, two beautiful eagles, and some vipers. How many pear-trees have you in your garden? Only four, but they are full of pears. Have you any cherry- trees? Yes, sir ; I have two, but they have no cherries. That lady speaks as if she were well acquainted with medicine. Cer- tainly ; she is a doctor, and when she speaks about business, no one would doubt that she is a merchant. Is she a philosopher ? I do not know. If she is a philosopher too, we may call her a cyclopedia personified. Call her as you like, I think (that) she is a woman remarkable for knowledge and good sense. IIoW did you like the play? . I did not like it at all. What was the plot ? All nonsense : a shepherd was in love with a shepherdess, and wished to marry her ; she rejected him, saying (that) she did not understand what he meant ; the young shepherd was in great despair, and did not know what to do. At this point, a fairy, who protected the lad, gave him a snake, and touched the lass with a magic wand. Now 'the scene was changed: he became indifferent, and she began to follow him everywhere. Finally, the little cottage in which they were was transformed into a beautiful palace ; the shepherd became a king, and the shepherdess a queen ; and, as they had no attendants, the good fairy changed a goat into a long-bearded steward, a cock became a count, and three hens three beautiful marchionesses. 130 PREPOSITIONS. LESSON XL PREPOSITIONS. 297. The Prepositions, thus far, have been con- sidered mainly in connection with the article, to show the various cases of the nouns. But, more particularly, 298. Di is used to indicate possession, material, character, and origin ; as, Questo libro e di mio padre . . . This book is my father's. Una bottiglia di vino A bottle of wine. Uti uomo di merito A man of merit. Un giovahe di alii natali ... A youth of high birth. Un cappello di paglia A straw hat. 299. The need or the desire of expressing our thoughts with rapidity has led the Italians to omit one of the two nouns connected by the preposition di; consequently, many of the Italian verbs are to be found governing this preposition. By a close analysis the connecting word which has been omit- ted can be ascertained; for example, Domandare di qualcuno ... To ask after any one. Dare del briccone a qualcuno . To call one a rogue. Fare di cappello a qualcuno . . To make a bow. Far d* occhio a qualcuno ... To give the wink to any one. The ellipses in these phrases might be supplied as follows : Domandare la persona di qualcuno. Dare il tilolo di briccone a qualcuno. Fare un saluto di cappello a qualcuno. Fare un ccnno d^occhio a qualcuno. PREPOSITIONS. 131 VARIOUS USES OF THE PREPOSITION DL Mori di morte improvvha . He died suddenly. Scrisse di propria pugno . . He wrote with his own hand. Parti di volo, di corsa ... He departed in haste. Lo dico di cuore I say it from the heart. Penso di scrivergli . . . I think of writing to him. 300. The preposition a is generally employed to express the tendency of the subject towards a per son, place, or thing, whether the motion is under- stood, commenced, or ended ; as, Verra a Parigi suhilo .... He will come to Paris soon. Giunse a Roma ieri sera . . He reached Rome last night. Se andassi a casa rostra ... If I could go to your house. 301. All the verbs of motion which express a direction towards any object are followed by the preposition a; as, Vado a Roma. I am going to Rome. This preposition is also used to connect the word expressing the motive power with that expressing the object set in motion ; as, Mulino a vento Windmill. Legno a vcle Sail-boat. Macchina a vapore Steam-engine. VARIOUS USES OF THE PREPOSITION A. Una casa a pian terreno. A house with a ground-floor Una casa a ire piani. A house w^Uj^tfeee storigs. Andavano a due a due. They wentrtwo by two. Si divisero a quatiro, a cinque. They divided themselves into groups a otto. of four, of five, of eight. Una scala a lumaca. , A spiral staircase. Da oggi a otto. This day week. Da oggi a quindici. This day fortnight. Fu battuto a morte. He was beaten to death. 132 PREPOSITIONS. VOCABULARY. Beyond, besides . . Oltre. Boat Baiiello. Brick Mattone. Captain Capitano. Country girl . . . Contadina. To deceive .... Ingannare. To dress Vesiire. Gold Oro. Kitchen Cucina. Story Piano. Present Presenie. To receive .... Ricevere. Residence Residenza. Ribbon JVastro. Satin Raso. Sea Mere. Shore Spiaggia. Silver Argento. Straw Paglia, Velvet Velluto. Watch Oriolo. To wear Portare. EXERCISE XXXIX. Where is your silver watch ? I sold it yesterday. Vi^'hy did you sell it ? Because I have received a present of a gold watch. How is your friend? He was well last week. Have you not seen him this week? No, because he went to Paris last Satur- day. "With whom did he go ? With his brother, tlie captain of the steamboat " Europa." If you will give me a black cloth coat, I will give you this fine silk dress. AVhat shall I do with it? This is a very good dress for your sister. I would give you what you ask, if I were rich. It is time to go home. What o'clock is it? It is half past eleven. Where are you going? I am going to market. What are you going to do at market? I am going to buy some peaches and cherries. Have you no cherries in your country-house ? I have two cherry-trees, but I have no cherries this year. Where do you intend to go next summer ? I shall go to the sea-shore. To your sister's resi- dence? I am not sure. Do you know how many rooms there are in your father's tliree-story brick house ? I believe (that) there are seventeen rooms beside the kitchen and the dining- room. Who is that lady with a satin dress ? I do not know, but I think (that) she is my music-teacher's sister. I thought (that) she was a country girl. Why did you think so ? Because she wjars a straw hat with a velvet ribbon, and this is not the fashion. I think (tliat) the boat fashion is to bo simple and without affectation in dressing, speaking, and in everything. You are mistaken, sir ; there is a fashion in every tiling, and if we do not follow it, every one calls us rude. Let the fool drees 08 others wish ; let the wise do what he likes. PREPOSITIONS. 133 LESSON XLI THE PREPOSITIONS DA, PER. 302. The Preposition da is used, 1. To express a relation of dependence, origin, or departure ; as. La mia riuscita dipende da vol . . My success depends on you. La cariia comincia da se stesso . . Charity begins at home. '^ Some verbs, "which express by themselves the action of parting from an object, instead of da take di, if the noun has no article ; as, Uscir di casa To go out of the house. Levarsi di tavola To leave the table. Cadere di mano To fall out of the hand. But, if the noun is preceded by the article, da is used ; as, Uscir dalla casa di qualcuno . . To go out of any one's house. Levarsi dalla tavola To leave the table. 2. Before all words which express the use or destination of any object ; as, Boiiiglia da vino Wine-bottle. Casa da vendere House for sale. Tabacco da fumare Smoking tobacco 3. To express < at > the Jiouse of; as, [to J Lo trovereie da mio fratello . You will find him at my brother's. Andro dal medico I shall go to the physician's. Vado dalui I am going to his house. N. B. — If the personal pronoun which follows da is an objective pronoun in the same person with the subject, as io da me, tu da ie, these pronouns da me, da te, have the meaning oi alone ; thus, Io vado da me means I am going by myself (alone). Voi andate da voi '* You are going by yourself. But Io vado da voi means I am going to your house. Voi andate da me *' You are going to my house 134 PREPOSITIONS. VARIOUS USES OF THE PREPOSITION DA Avete da fare ? Datemi da lavorare. Gli diedi da venti dollari ieri mattina. Vi promettOf da galantuomo^ di non parlare. Dite da vero o dite da burla ? lofaccio da maestro di musica. Egli fa da gran signore. Venite da me. JVon e da scherzo, Un uomo da bene. Questo e un soggello da commedia. Egli vive da principe. Sono stato morso da quel cane. Un uomo da lodare. Un* arma da difendere. Da noi non si par I a Inglese. Egli e pazzo da catena. Fate da pranzo per died. Da uomo di onore. Voi parlate da senno. L'uomo dair abito nero. J\oi viaggiammo da otto mesi. Passai invano da casa vostra ieri sera. Have you anything to do ? Give me something to do. I gave him about twenty dollafs yesterday morning. I promise to you, on the faith of a gentleman, not to speak. Do you speak in earnest or in jest ? I teach music. He plays the great lord. Come to my house. 'T is not a thing to joke about. A good man. This is a subject fit for a comedy He lives like a prince. I have been bitten by that dog. A man to be praised. An arm (weapon) for defence. With us English is not spoken. He is mad enough to be chained. Prepare dinner for ten. As a man of honor. You speak wisely. The man with the black coat. We travelled about eight months. It was in vain that I passed by your house last night. 303. The preposition per is used to express the reason why, the cause hy which, and the manner in which, a thing is accomplished. It answers to the English for, through, in order to, and must always be expressed in Italian, though understood English; as, m Scrivo per compiacervi. Per le continue piogge, il fiume sbocco. Per me si va nella cilia dolente. I write to please you. Because of the continual rains, the river overflowed. Through me one goes into the citj of woe. PREPOSITIONS. 135 304. Per followed by an infinitive after the verbs stare and essere signifies to he about, to he on the point of; as, Sto per patire. I am about to depart. lo era per par tire quanto egli I was about to depart when he venne. came. VARIOUS USES OF THE PREPOSITION PER. Falelo per me. Do it on my own account. Fatelo per me ! I pray do it for (the love of) me ! Ebbi pane per nove giorni. I had bread nine days. Per we, non lofarei. As for me, I would not do it. Per me (per conto mio) non lo I would not do it on my owd farei. account. Fu adorato per sanio. He was adored as a saint. La citta fu 'assalita per mare e The city was assailed by sea and per terra. land. 305. In fuori sometimes follows the case it gov erns; as, In fuori di questo, iuito va bene. ") „ x x, • rr, ,, r J. 4 • ^ • ^ Except this, everything goes well. Tutio va bene di questo m fuori. ) 306. Di Id and di qua are followed by the prepo- sition da; but al di Id and al di qua are generally followed by the preposition di; as, Di qua dal fiume ) nr,. -i ,.., . ^,j- ^ /, ^ ^ This side of the river. ^l di qua del fiume ) Al di la del ponte. 1 m ^ • i i?xi, u -j _.. -^ , , ^ y That side of the bridge Di la dal ponte ) ex.\:mples. Did I leave my book here? Ho io lasciato il mio libro qui? You left it at my sister's. Voi lo lasciaste da mia sorella. I can go out whenever I like. Posso uscire quando voglio. That soldier is a brave man. Quel soldato e un valoroso. 136 PREPOSITIONS. VOCABULARY. Arrogant . . . . Arrogante. Mouthful . . Boccone. To ascertain . . Accertarsi. To meet . . Iiicontrare,. Boldly . . . . . Arditumente. Necklace . . Collana. Consequence . . Conseqxienza. To nourish . Alimentare,. To consider . . . Considerare. Rabble . . . Canaglia. To consume . . . Consumare. To remark . Rimarcare. Courtesy . . . . Cortesia. To rush . . Lanciarsi. i)anger. . . . . Pericolo. Temper . . Temper amento. To grapple . . . Aygrappare. Violent. . . Violento. Match , . . . . Accojjpiare. Whenever . Ogni qual volta. EXERCISE XL. Have you my brother's French dictionary, or mine ? I have neither your brother's dictionary nor yours ; I have my sister's dictionary. Is your sister's dictionary as good as mine ? My sister always has the best books that can be found ; so that, if it is not better than yours, it must certainly be as good (as yours). If you promise me to come and see me this afternoon, I will go with you to my father's. I have many things to do, and shall not be able to come. Where did you leave your gloves ? I left them in my bed-room. Why does that man always go alone ? Because he has no friends. Would you call a man who does not know what danger is a brave man ? No, I would not call him so ; because he who rushes upon danger without considering its consequences has in him the nature of a brute. Then who is to be called a brave man ? The man who, knowing the danger, meets it boldly, either through necessity, or for some honorable cause. Where did your brother find that wine-bottle ? That is not a wine-bottle. What is it, then ? It is a bottle of wine. 0, I thought it was empty; but where did you find it? I found it at my father's. At what time could I go to your father's to-night ? You can go whenever you like ; but I will send my servant to ascertain when he will be at home. Do they speak English in your country ? But few persons speak English in our country, but many read and translate it very well. The lady wliom Milton married after he had become blind was very beautiful, but of a violent temper. One of the poet's friends, wishing to praise her beauty, remarked that she was a rose. " I know it," said Milton, " not by the color, but by the thorns." USE OP THE THIRD PERSON FEMININE. 137 LESSON XLII. USE OF THE THIRD PERSON FEMININE. 307. Beside the way of addressing an individual in the second person plural, common to all other languages, the Italians have adopted the use of the third person, Ella, which is equivalent to the title Vostra Signoria, Your Lordship, or Your Ladyship. This peculiar form of address is chiefly used to evince a mark of respect to a superior, and often as a mere matter of etiquette in speaking to a gen- tleman or lady with whom one is not intimately acquainted. In such a case, the verb is to be used in the third person singular if the subject is Ella, and in the third person plural if the subject is Elleno, The past participle or any adjective must also be in the feminine form, and must agree with the subject. E Ella contenta ? Are you contented (lady or gentleman) ? Sono Elleno contente ? Are you contented (ladies or gentlemen) ? f^ Particular care should be taken to liave all the pronouns referring to the subject Ella or Elleno in the third person ; as, Ha Ella studiato la sua lezione. Hanno Elleno studiato la loro lezione. And not Ha Ella studiato la vostra lezione. Hanno Elleno studiato la sua lezione. 308. This peculiarity of the Italian language is not recommended to foreigners, 1. Because it did not originate with the language. Dante, Petrarch, Boccaccio, did not adopt this form, but always used the second person plural, voi. 7 138 IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. 2. Because the progress of democracy tends now to equalize all classes, and this mode of address ia beginning to be obsolete. 3. Because foreigners/ who visit Italy, with a limited knowledge of the language, would be more . at home in addressing persons in their usual way ; moreover, they can say to any lady or gentleman Come state: Fatemi un favore, without the least apprehension of being charged with want of refine- ment, whilst it would be ludicrous to address a ser- vant or a porter in the third person, and say. Mi dia un hicchier d^acqua. Mandi questa lettera alia posta. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Avere in pregio. Avere in odio. Avere per ignorante. Avere un tempo di paradiso. Aver fretta. Aver fumo. Aver d' uopo. Avere in ordine. or in pronto. Aver mala voce. Averla con uno. Essere da qualche cosa. Essere a cavallo. Eisere di buona nascita. Essere a parte di . . . , Esser benveduto. Esser malveduto. Essere in grado di . . . . Essere a mal termine. Esser scar so di denari. Essere in ritardo. To appreciate. To hate. To beHeve (some one) ignorant To have a good time. To be in haste. To be proud. To have need. To have in readiness. To be ill spoken of. To be angry with one. To be good for something. To be out of trouble. To come of a good family. To be partaker of ... . To have a good reputation To have a bad name. To be able to ... . To be in a bad condition. To have but little money. To be la to. EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. 139 EXAMPLES. [ am afraid I shall see my broth- Temo di non vedere mai inu V er's friend no more. amico di mio fratello. Have I offended you in any way ? Vi ho io mai offeso ? I think him impertinent. Io credo che egli sia impertinenU I mean to say that he is proid. Io voglio dire che egli e orgogliosc. I asked my brother for money. Domandai denaro a mio fratello. How old are you ? I am eighteen Quanti anni avete ? Ho dicioilo years old. amii. But as for my books. Ma in quanio ai miei libri. So much the better. Tanio meglio. EXERCISE XLI. What is the matter with you, my good friend? I cannot tell you what is the matter with me, but the sight of that man always puts me in a state that I cannot describe. Probably it is because you are not well acquainted with him. I hope 1 shall never have such acquaintances. Has he offended you in any way ? He has not (offended me) , but he is conceited, and I dislike men like him, because they generally have but little wit. Then you think him ignorant. Certainly, he is not only igno- rant and superstitious, but he is spoken ill of too. I pity him. And I hate him. 0, no ; we must never hate any one. I do not mean to say that I really hate him, but I can never find his society as agreeable as it may be to you. " How old are you ? " asked a lady of one of her tenant-farmers. " I cannot really tell," replied he, " whether I am thirty-eight or forty- eight.'- " How can you forget your age? " said the lady, with surprise. "Madam," said he, "I could tell you how much money I possess, how many cows and sheep I have ; but as for my years, I never trouble myself to count them, as I cannot lose one of them, and no one can take one from me." I wish I had twenty thousand dollars ; and I wish to have a good reputation. What could you do with your good reputation without a penny in your pocket ? I do not know ; yet I should prefer a good name without money to a bad name with plenty of it. But you must remember that a man without money is not able to do what he likes. So much the better. 140 OP THE PRONOUN SI. LESSON XLIII. OF THE PRONOUN SI. 309. When the pronoun si is used before a verb, although it can be expressed in English by the indefinite pronoun one or they, or by the passive voice, it is in Italian but the object of the verb used reflectively. Si dice, si vede, have the meaning of questa cosa e detta, or veduta, — this thing is said or seen. Consequently, the verb must agree v^ith the subject, if a subject is to be found in the sentence * Si vende un cavallo A horse is sold. Si vendono due cavalli . . . Two horses are sold. 310. In compound tenses, the verb essere, to be, must be employed instead of the verb avere, to have, because all reflective verbs in Italian are conjugated with the verb essere ; as. Si e venduto un cavallo ... A horse has been sold. Si sono venduti due cavalli . . Two horses have been sold. !j^ We may also say, as in English, E stato venduto un cavallo; tono stati venduti due cavalli. 311. Instead of si, una may be used, when si can be replaced by one, a man, a person ; as, Quando uno dorme, non pensa a guai. When one sleeps, he does not think of troubles. Ij^" We may also say, quando donniamo non pensiamo a guai. 312. When, in compound tenses, si is used with a conjunctive pronoun, the verb venire may be employed instead of essere, with the omission of the pronoun si ; as. Mi si g detlo, or ^ Mi e stato dettoy or > It has been said to me. Mi vicn ietto. J SYNONYMS AND IDIOMS. 141 SYNONYMS. FEAR, PAURA, TIMORE. The coward hasj^awra!, but not timore, of doing a thing. A brave man has timore, but not paura, of doing a thing. Paura originates in cowardice ; timore, in excessive prudence. We have timore^ and not paura, of God. The good citizen is afraid of the hiws. Ha timore dclle hggi. The thief is afraid of the laws. Ha paura dclle leggi. TO RUB, STOFINARE, STROPICCIARE. Sirojinare is the act of rubbing gently with the hand, or with a soft object. Stropicciare is the act of rubbing hard with the foot, or with a hard object. AVe rub, strofiniamo, a piece of amber, or a stiffened limb. We rub, stropicciamo, a horse, or the floor. IDIOMATIC EXPEESSIONS. Andar dietro a . . . . Andar in collera. Andare in buon ora. Andar e in malora. Andar per la mente. Andare a cavallo. Andare a spasso. Andare alio scuro. Andare a monte. Andare a verso. Andar col pie di piombo. Andar dicendo. Andare in bestia. Andar tentone. Questo vi sta bene. Stare in disagio. Stare a galla. Stare in pericolo. Star zitto. To follow, or solicit. To put one's self in a passion. To go in peace. To be ruined. To come into one's mind. To ride on horseback. To go a walking. To act in ignorance. To prove vain. To succeed well. To go heedfuUy. To report. To fall into a passion. To grope about. That becomes you well To live in sorrow. To float. To be in danger. To be hushed. 142 EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. EXAMPLES. Your sister was oflFered a book by Un libro fu offer to a vosira $o- her friend. rella dal suo amico. I am well provided with money. Sono ben provveduto di denaro. All will succeed well with me. Tulto mi riuscira bene. I saw him writing. lo lo vidi scrivere. He does not know what to say. E(/li non sa cio che dice. EXERCISE XLII. A brave soldier, who had lost both arms in a combat, was offered a dollar by his solonel. I thank you for your generosity, said the brave soldier ; you must certainly think that I have lost but a pair of gloves. A traveller should be provided with four pockets : the first, for his health ; the second, for a good com- panion ; the third, larger than the others, for patience ; and the fourth, the largest of all, for his money. "With such means, he will be sure that everything will succeed well with him. How many miles can you walk in a day ? I have never made the attempt, but I think I could walk about tw^enty-one (miles), if I were obliged to do so. I hope that you will never be obliged to walk so far, because I am sure that you could not walk more than twelve miles. You do not know what to say. Do not put yourself into a passion ; I say what I mean. A man like yourself, accustomed to ride always on horseback, could not walk more than ten miles a day ; take my word for it. Diogenes, seeing one day a young man blushing, " You are afraid of making mis- takes," said he ; " courage, my boy, this is the color of virtue." Do you see that man at the corner of the street ? I see him. Do you know him ? No, I do not (know him), but I think that he is not a good man, because he follows everybody, and I am afraid (that) he will follow me, if he sees mo alone in the street. How does the color of this dress become me ? The color becomes you well, but I do not like the dress. Why not ? Because it is too largo and too long. This is the fashion. I do not care about the fashion ; I cannot boar to see a lady dragging about a skirt as large as the cupola of St. Peter in Home. Silence ! and do not fall into a passion for what cannot be helped. ELLIPSES, 143 LESSON XLIV ELLIPSES. 313. The Italian language, though easy in its pro- nunciation, and regular in its construction, presents many difficulties to those who aim at a thorough knowledge of it, because of its being filled with elliptical phrases, whose meaning, though readily caught by the natives, accustomed to express a long series of ideas by a single word, a look, or a gesture, can only be understood by foreigners through a keen activity of judgment and an accu- rate analysis. The following practical observations may be of some help to students. ELLIPSES OF NOUNS. 314. The preposition di or an adjective naturally presupposes a noun. If, to give a greater degree of interest and beauty to the phrase by its conciseness, the noun is omitted, it may be supplied by analy- sis; as, n dotto inventa, V ignorante imita, i. e., V tiomo doito, or igjiorante. Si domanda di voi, i. e., si domanda la persona di vol. Era di primavera, i. e., era nella stagione di primavera. Cadere da alto, i. e., cadere da luogo alto. ELLIPSES OF CONJUNCTIONS AND CORRELATIVES. 315. The conjunction die is often omitted before verbs used in the subjunctive mood ; as, Vorrei mi diciate la veriia, for Vorrei che mi diciate la verita. 316. Instead of jpercM, cM is often used ; as, Che nan corriamo alia ciila che e meta, for Perche nan .... 144 ELLIPSES AND IDIOMS. 317. The antecedent or consequent term of a comparison is often understood ; as, Siccome non fu bene accolto se ne partly for cosi se ne parti. Mi trovate quale mi lasciaste, for tale, quale ... ELLIPSES OF VERBS AND Px\RTICIPLES. 318. A verb or participle is suppressed in a prop- osition when its meaning can be easily supphed by analogy ; as. Via di qua, i. e., andate via di qua. Mandare pel medico, i. e., mandare una persona a cercare, o chia» mare il medico, Appenafui al posto assegnato, i. e., appena Jui arrivato . . JVel mezzo del cammi?i di nostra vita, i. e., essendo ncl mezzo del IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Darscia a gambe. Dar fede a. Dare ad intendere. Dare in luce. Dar si pensiero. Dare in prestito. Dar sicurta. Dar la caccia. Dar principio, fine Dar si alio studio. Dar si bel tempo. Dare a credenza. Dare a pigione. Dar si briga. Dar da bere, da mangiare. Dar fondo. Dar la baia. Dar ncl berzaglio. Dar norma. Daie un^ occhiata. Dar si ad una cosa. To run away. To believe. To make one believe. To give birth, to publish. To care for. To lend. To bail. To pursue. To begin, to end. To apply one's self to study. To divert one's self. To sell upon credit. To let out on rent. To trouble one's self. To give sometoing to drink, eat To cast anchor. To mock at. To hit the mark. To prescribe a rule. To cast an eye at. To apply one's self to a thing. EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. 145" EXAMPLES. To enter a room. Entrare in una stanza. I used to write. loera solito di, or soleva scrivere Not in the least. JViente affatlo. I put my hand to my heart. Mi misi la mano al cuore. EXERCISE XLIII. A literary man was once so much absorbed in the translation of a book that he gave orders to his servants never to allow any one to enter his library, where he used to work from morning until evening. One day, when he was nearly at the end of his work, a servant came in great haste and announced that his lady had fallen down, and that she was seriously hurt. Do you think that he started at the news ? Not in the least. Turning over the leaves of a large Greek dictionary, he told the servant to go for the doctor. After a while, another servant came in, telling him that his lady was at the point of death, and that she wished to see him. " I will be ready in a moment," said he ; "I have but a few lines to translate." Scarcely had he said so, when the chambermaid entered, with her eyes filled with tears, say- ing that her mistress had expired. Did the translator drop the pen he held in his hand ? No ; but, putting his left hand to his forehead and rubbing it gently, he exclaimed, "Ah, poor me ' she was a very good woman," and, rubbing his forehead for a while, which seemed to erase the memory of the good woman, went on in his work. I cannot believe such a story. Do you think that I would try to make you believe it, if it were not true? No, I do not think so, but I would apply myself to the reading of such books as elevate the mind and ennoble the heart, rather than stories invented only to call forth the evil part of our nature. But should we not mention a circumstance, which has really taken place ? Not anything which is contrary to common sense, and the natural flow of feeling in a human heart. What you have just mentioned is not creditable ; it must be exagger- ated ; and if it were just as you mention it, it is an exception to the general rule, and I would advise you not to repeat it, or embellish it only to divert yourself, because, if you do so, no on« will believe what you say, even when you speak in earnest. 146 ELLIPSES. LESSON XLV ELLIPSES, continued, ELLIPSES OF PERSONAL, POSSESSIVE, AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 319. Personal Pronouns are commonly omitted before verbs, because the number and person of the verb is indicated by the termination of each tense. Amo has always the meaning of / love, and amate of you love, because o is the characteristic ter- mination of the first person singular, and te of the second person plural. Nevertheless, personal pro- nouns must be expressed when their omission might cause doubt, as well as when we wish to point at one person to the exclusion of another ; as, Egli scrivBy or ella scrive ; io, or effliy or ella scriveva Eglino scrivevano, or elleno scrivevano. Voi avete detto cost ; egli non disse nulla. 320. The possessive pronoun is often omitted when the idea of possession can be easily identified and supplied by analogy. If we say, Mio frafello verrd qui colla moglie, coi figli e con tutta la fami- glia, we mean with his wife, children, and family ; but the possessive pronoun is omitted in Italian, being considered superfluous. In the same way if we say vado in casa, in hottega, we mean my Jiouse, my store, because it is generally admitted that in such phrases the person speaking refers to his own house or store. Likewise, if we say non 7io studiato la lezione, we understand that it is my lesson, be ELLIPSES AND IDIOMS. 147 f^ause one would not properly lose his time in study- ing the lesson of another. JE^ The possessive pronoun can be supplied by the adjective pro- Tprio; egli parti collapropria carrozza, instead of colla sua carrozza 321. It is very common in Italian to suppress the relative pronouns che or il quale, together with the auxiliary verbs essere and avere, when used in the indicative mood. The past participle must in this case agree with the subject ; as, A'on posso raccontarvi Ic cose dette ofatte, i. e., le cose, rhe sono state dette fatte. Mi dolffo del libri perdutiy i. e., dei libri che ho perduto. N. B. — This elision may also take place by changing the verb from a passive into an active form ; as, n denaro datomi daW amico for II denaro che V amico mi ha dato IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Al far del giorno. At the break of day. Al far della notte. Towards evening. Far di mestieri. To be necessary. Far si innanzi. To come forvrard. Fare a gara. To strive for the victory. Fare alV amore. To make love. Far alto. To halt. Fare una cosa a pennello. To do a thing exactly. Far bisogno. To be needful. Far cerchio. To make a ring. Far cipiglio. To look frowningly. Far colazione. To breakfast. Far f route a. To face. Fare i fatti suoi. To foUovr one's own affairs. Fare il balordo. To play the ninny. Far le carte. To deal (at cards) . Far lo spasimato. To play the lover. Far sapere a qualcuno. To let one know. Far stare a segno qualcuno. To keep one under 148 EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. EXAMPLES. Not being able to ■write. JVbn potendo scrivere. Will you be so kind as to . . . Vorreste aver la bonta di . . To ask for a thing. Domandare una cosa. To ask for a person. Domandare di una persona. EXERCISE XLW. A preacher who had tired his audience with a sermon on th« beatitudes wab receiving the congratulations of his friends, when a lady of sense, not able to bear their ridiculous flattery, approached him, and with the greatest civility told him (that) she was sure that he had forgotten to mention one of the beatitudes, which she thought would have been warmly received by the audience. "How can that be?" said the preacher, looking frowningly. " It is impossible, madam ; I know very well what I am about ; you must have been distracted, and probably you did not follow the connection of the several points of my sermon." *' Not so, reverend father," said the lady ; " I was too attentive, and for this reason noticed it." " Will you be so kind as to mention it? " "If you will allow me, I will do so with pleas- ure," said the lady, as, with a smile on her lips, she said, " Father, you forgot to say. Blessed are those who did not hear your sermon," and, making a respectful bow, she retired. At what time do you breakfast ? Not always at the same hour. When we are in the country we breakfast at break of day, but while we remain in town we generally breakfast at eight o'clock. If you are not going to the country to-morrow, I will try to come and take breakfast with you. I will let you know (it). Who knocks ? Can one see a friend at this late hour ? I am glad to see you, my friend ; come in. Is it necessary to ask for permission ? Sit down. How do you do? How have you been? Uow is your mother ? And your sisters, how are they ? They are all well, and I am perfectly well, I thank you. How long have you been gone? Two years and a half. 0, you must give us a relation of all that you have seen and done ; we should be delighted to hear it. Should I relate to you all that I have seen and done, it would take me many a day ; but I will certainly comply with your wish by giving you an account of my journey I shall be very much obliged to you. DIMINUTION OF WORDS. 149 LESSON XLVI. DIMINUTION OF WORDS. . 322. The Italian language claims its preeminence among the living languages for its musical and sono- rous pronunciation. All words, except the article il and a few monosyllables, end in vowels ; their syl- lables, formed by an almost equal proportion of vowels and consonants, are so arranged as to pre- sent an admirable smoothness in their articulation. This peculiarity of the language, giving to the words an easy and flowing softness, distinguishes it from the English, whose chief tendency is to be direct and manly, by the use of sharp, brief, and harsh sounds. 323. To avoid the uniform termination of the same vowels, and to give more vigor to the expres- sion, the Italians often suppress the last vowel, and sometimes the last syllable of a word. 324. No definite rules can be assigned for these abbreviations, the only sure guide being the law of euphony subject to judgment. 325. The following rules are, however, to be observed : 1. No final vowel characteristic of the feminine or plural of nouns can ever be omitted. 2. No final vowel can be suppressed in the conju- gation of any verb, except in the infinitive, in the third person of both numbers, and sometimes in the first person plural. 150 MAXIMS AND FIGURES OP SPEECH. Hi^ The i of the second person of the imperative of verbs ending in nere and idre is often omitted when the following word commences with a consonant. 3. No final vowel is suppressed in words at the end of a sentence, or in words which are imme- diately followed hj z or s impure, N. B. — This rule is not observed in poetry. 4. Words ending in a, i, or in an accented vowel, are never retrenched, except Suora, a title for nuns ; as, Suor Mai^ia. Oraj now ; with its compounds ; as, ancoVj tahr. Fuori, out. Giovanni, John, when followed by another proper name ; as, Giovan BcUtista. leri, yesterday, when joined to sera or notte; as, ier notte, ier sera. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. Tenere uno sulla corda. ") m , . . i i .n 1 XI r 1^0 keep one on tenter-nooks. 10 keep one on the rope. } '■ Essere una cosa da dJzzina. | rj.^ ^^ something very common. To be a thing by thfe dozen. J Far hottega di ogni cosa. \ To keep an eye to the main To make shop of everything. J chance Comprarsi hrighe a denari con- tanti. I To make one's own troubles. To buy troubles with cash. Farla pagare con usura. ^ To make one pay dearly for an To make pay with usury. j injury. Eompere i fill di una trama, \ To break the thread of a plot. } To nip the evil in the bud. Pagare di cattiva moneta, \ To pay in bad money. j ^o be ungrateful. EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. 151 EX.LMPLES. How long will it take you to copy Q,uanto tempo vi bisognera per that letter ? copiare quella lettera ? I wish I could write it in twenty- lo vorrei poterla scrivere in ven- one minutes. tun minuto. I told him so, but it is of no use. lo glielo ho dettOy ma invano. To persist in doing a thing. Persistere a fare una cosa. EXERCISE XLV. A man can desire no mortal thing more than to behold hia enemy prostrated before him, and reduced to such a condition that he has him at his mercy ; but the greater the offence, the more the injured one is bound to render himself glorious by par- doning it ; this is one of the peculiar qualities of a generous and exalted spirit. How long does it take you to make an arti- ficial flower like that ? I can make them with little trouble, 1 wish I could have some of them. How many? Only a few. Very well ; I will send them to your house towards evening. You are very kind. How do you like the flowers my friend's sister wears on her bonnet ? I do not like them at all ; they are very ugly flowers. Why does your brother keep that man on tenter-hooks ?: — is it not better to say that he cannot do any- thing for him ? He has tried several times to get rid of him, but it is of no use ; he persists in thinking that my brother has the power to help him. Does your friend know of the death of her daughter ? No, she does not know of it yet ; we have only men- tioned that she was very ill, and that possibly she might not recover, but I have not had the courage to tell her of the death of her only daughter ; I have endeavored to prepare her first saying, that should misfortune come, she must submit to Provi- dence and be resigned. I would rather speak plainly than tor- ture her thus with anxiety. I am going to do so to-night ; but fthe is very feeble, and the doctor fears that such overwhelming intelligence might prove fatal to her. Who is that man ? I do not know ; but I think that my brother knows him well. Do you think that he has an ugly look ? Yes, indeed. He has not only an ugly look, but he is an exceedingly disagreeable person. You are too severe upon him. 1.52 DIMINUTION OF WORDS. LESSON XLVII. DIMINUTION OF WORDS, continued. 326. The final e, forming a syllable with the pre* ceding consonant I, n, and r, is often omitted ; as, Una ial cosa Such a thing. Pan nero Dark bread. Cuor fedele Faithful heart. N. B. — The e is not omitted if the consonants Z, n, and r, are pre- ceded by any other consonant in the same syllable. 327. When the final e is preceded by a double r, instead of the e the final syllable re is omitted ; as, Condur, indur, and not condurry indurr. 328. When two infinitives follow each other, the first infinitive is always used without the e ; as. Far chiamare. Poter scrivere. 329. The final o is omitted when preceded by the consonant I, m, n, and r, in one syllable ; as. Pel maculato. Uom da nulla Man bianca. Lor Siynore. 330. When the o is preceded by a double ?, as cappello, cavallo,fa7iciullo, followed by a word com- mencing with a consonant, except z, or s impure, instead of the o the syllable lo is omitted ; as, Cappel, cavalyfanciul, not CappelU cavally fanciull. Fanciul vezzoso Charming youth. Caval feroce Wild horse. N. B. — It has been mentioned in the preceding lessons that bello, grandty santo,frate, drop the last syllable, or change the last vowel into an apostrophe, acccording to the beginning of the word following them MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. 153 331. Though the laws of euphony are the chief elements of the existence of Italian, the above rules have been generally established by the best writers of the language, to add to it more elegance, beauty, and harmony. 332. It is also for the sake of euphony that an i is prefixed to words commencing with s impure, when the preceding word ends in n or r ; as, per iscIierzOj con istrade; and that a c^ is added to the preposition a, and to the conjunction e, when these letters are immediately followed by a word com- mencing with a vowel ; as, nemici, ed amid corsero ad incontrarlo. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. Partare acqua al mare. ) , i.t „ , . i. i. 0.1 * r To carry coals to Nefwcastle. To bring water to the sea. J "^ Mettere il capitale a frutto. \ ^ , , . , „ ^ ,, -i^ 1 J. /> -i. f lo put money at interest. To put the capital to iruit. ) ^ •' 11 male mette profonde radici. '\ The evil is gaining a strong The evil strikes deep roots. J hold. Zappare alV acqua e seminars' al vento. To sow to the wind and to dig . To search for a needle in a hay- mow. |- To be weak-minded. in the water. Non aver sale in zucca. Not to have salt in the squash. Salvare la capra e i cavolL I ^^ ^^^^ ^^^,^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^ To save both the goat and the > ., cabbage. J Inarcare le ciglia. ) To arch the eyebrows. I "^^ ^ dumb-founded. 164 EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. EXA^IPLES. To display one's own ability. Far mostra del suo talento, I am endeavoring to write well. Mi sto provando di scriver bene He is going away. Effli sen (se ne) va via. How many times did I write to Quanie volte non gli scrissiy ma him, but in vain ! invano ! EXERCISE XLVI. A preacher was once displaying all his abilities in a panegyric in praise of St. George ; among the various repetitions which he introduced, with great pomposity he said, " Where shall I place my saint? — Among the angels and the archangels? No. Shall I place him among the patriarchs, among the prophets ? No. Among the apostles, the evangelists, or the doctors of the church ? No, no. Where shall I plaCe him, then ? ". . . And he was endeavoring to be more impressive by a moment's silence, when one of the auditors, rising from his seat, exclaimed, " My father, if you are not able to find a place for your saint, you can give him my seat, because I am going away." I am told that your friend has squandered all his property ; can I believe it ? Yes, it is so. How many times did I tell him not to be so open- handed, and to put his money at interest ! But he did not listen to me : on the contrary, having plenty of gold, and nothing to do, he began to make a great display of horses and carriages ; his house was always crowded with men of little merit, and with flatterers, who professed to be his friends and admirers ; and now that his money is all gone, his friends have disappeared, and he is left alone and uncared for. Is he discouraged ? Yes, he ia (discouraged), and regrets that he did not listen to my words. He ought to be resigned. That is what he cannot do. It is hard in misfortune to remember happy days, and be resigned ; he now repents of the many times, that, to show that he had the means of doing what he liked, he ran great risks, and now finds that he has been left alone, no one caring for him at all. My friend, this proves that when a man refuses to listen to the advice of his friends he cannot help being ruined ; every one must profit by his own experience. Very true ; but still it is not pleasant fco see a friend in sorrow and misery TRANSPOSITION OF \V0RDi5. 155 LESSON XLVIII. TRANSPOSITION OF WORDS. 333. Though the Italian language draws ita origin from the Latin, it differs considerably in its construction. The Latins were the rulers of the world, and they aimed at great effects, even in the use of their language. Their style was ma- jestic, but it required a steady and close attention. There was no established order in the use of words, but the idea of the phrase was strengthened by a transposition and antithesis of expression, which excited more interest in the hearer than a formal or prosaic statement. 334. The Italians have followed the logical con- struction of arranging words according to their respective value and order of relation ; i. e., the subject before the verb, the object after it, and the adjective or adverb after the noun or verb they modify. 335. This grammatical construction has generally been adopted in the familiar and descriptive style. In the former, any transposition of words is consid- ered an affectation ; in the latter, those transposi- tions are only permitted which do not obscure the clearness of the sentence. 336. Yet the Italians, because of the flexibility of their language, admit of the transposition of 156 TRANSPOSITION OF WORDS. words in the historical, poetical, and oratorial style, whenever its object is to present the principal idea of a sentence in the highest degree of clearness to the mind, and harmony to the ear. 337. The following sentences are here given, in order that the pupil may replace the words in their logical arrangement, and compare the harmony and vigor of both forms of construction : Perb dell' intenzione che avea si guardo bene di fare il mini- mo cenno. Nella magnificenza degli edifizii, la Italia supera ogni naziono. E meglio passar sotto silenzio quello che senza dolore ricordar non si puo. Chi ti fa carezze piii che non suole, o tradire, o ingannare ti vuole. Ogni mal fresco agevolmente si sana. Chi fa male e spera bene, se stesso inganna. La fortuna aiuta i pazzi sempre, ei birbanti assi volte. Sanno rarissime volte gli uomini essere o al tutto tristi o al tutto buoni. In cose disoneste obbligati non siamo ad ubbidire a nessuno. Dopo la burrasca e sempre piii lucido il sole. Pare che il sole, e la donna deviso si abbiano I'impero del mondo ; I'uno ci da i giorni, Taltra li abbellisce. SYNONYMS. STEP OF A STAIRCASE, GRADINO, SCALING. Gradino is the spacious and commodious step of a public ouilding. Scalino is the step of a staircase in a private dwelling. When we go to church or to the state-house, we ascend gradini. When we go to our cellar or to the top of the house, we gen- erally ascend and descend scalini. EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. 157 EXAMPLES. A book has been stolen from me. Mi e stato rubato un libro. I make a great deal of money. lo guadagno molto denaro. He cannot succeed in injuring me. JVb/i pub riuscire a farmi male. He promises much, but, after all, Eglipromette molto, ma, alfar dei he does not keeps his word. conti, noii mantiene la parola. EXERCISE XLVII. A certain merchant, from whom a large sum of money had been stolen, suspecting that the thief was one of his servants, called them all to his room, and said that the angel Gabriel, to whom he was particularly devoted, appeared to him in the night and told him that the man who had stolen the money was not far from him, and that his patron saint would show the thief in the morning, if he would kneel and pray ; consequently he knelt, and made all his servants kneel. After a few minutes of silent prayer, he exclaimed, " I thank thee, my guardian angel, for having revealed to me that the thief can be detected by a white spot he has on his nose." Then rising, and asking the others to rise that he might look them in the face, he saw that one of the servants, instead of exposing himself to his examina- tion, was trying to conceal his face by looking at some pictures. " Behold the thief," said the master ; " I can see very plainly the white spot." The servant, being afraid, confessed all, and the merchant recovered all his property, making the servant pay dearly for it. How does your friend succeed in his undertaking ? E scarcely know ; he makes a great deal of money ; but he has been ungrateful to me. What has he done ? Well, he has been endeavoring to enlarge his business by saying that I have too much to do, and that I cannot attend to all the commissions that are given me ; he would probably have succeeded in injuring me, if a good friend of mine had not made me aAvare of his secret manoeuvring. I am very sorry ; but can he not injure you now ? No, he cannot. I have already nipped the evil in the bud. Who is that lady on your right ? I do not know her personally ; but I am told that she is proud, and prodigal of her promises, but, after all, she never accomplishes what she says. 158 DERIVATION OF WORDS. LESSON XLIX, DEEIYATION OF WORDS. 338. The effect of civilization, and the need of representing ideas by words in common use in a nation, have, to a great extent, contributed to the increase of the vocabulary of the various idi- oms. When a word borrowed from one language is adopted into another, it generally preserves ita radical or elementary letters, but suffers a change in its primitive termination. This change varies in nations according to the nature and tendency of their language j and, if no remarkable alteration takes place in the original termination, the word becomes naturalized, and is christened in the new language with a mark of nationality by the change of its pronunciation. This change of termination or pronunciation is peculiar to each language. The English, with a calculating and contemplative mind, and in their origin influenced by the Druidic religion, express themselves in a language full of monosyllables and short words, of sharp and inartic- ulate sounds, and exhibit their national type by com- pressing and condensing the newly-adopted words. The Italians, with a more flowing and graceful ele- gance, give to the new words, as a characteristic of their language, a polj^syllabic nature, and an easy and musical articulation. S39. This difference of the two languages, though MAXIMS AND J^^IGURES OF SPEECH. 159 obvious in itself, is made more sensible by simply examining those infinitives and adverbs which, retaining the same radical letters, assume a charac- teristic termination. For example : Comparing the infinitives to Jln-ish, to jper-mitj to sack, with the cor responding Italian Ji-ni-re, per-met-te-re, sac-cheg-gia- 7'e, it will be easily perceived that infinitives in Italian have one, two, or three syllables more than those in English. Likewise, comparing the adverbs brie/-l2/, ju-di-cious-ly, with the corresponding Italian, hre-ve-men-te, giu-di-zi-o-sa-men-te, it will be seen that the termination li/ of the adverbs, used in English without a marked accent, and only to pre- sent the word in an adverbial form, is in Italian expressed by mente, a termination of two syllables, with an accent on the first, which, as illustrated in the above examples, represents a state of mind (mente) disposed to brevity and judiciousness. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. Tenere uno in croce. ") rr, . , . n, , ,, y lo torture one with anxiety. To keep one on the cross. j "^ Battersila guancia. '\ To smite one's own cheek. J ^o repent of anything. Mordersi la mano, le dita. "j To bite one's own hand or fin- \ To be in despair. gers. J Allargare la mano. ) To open the hand. I ^" ^^ open-handed. j- To work underhand. Lavorare sotV acqua To work under water. Dare molte fronde e paca uva. To give many leaves and few grapes. Great cry and little wool. 160 EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. EXAMPLES. Egli conjido un segreto a mio He intrusted my brother with a fratello. secret. H vostro temperino non mi place. I do not like your pen-knife. Egli scrivera una buona lettera He is going to -write a good letter domani. to-morrow. EXERCISE XLVIII. It has been observed, that when a nation has the opportunity of colonizing a new place, it gives to it the impress of its promi- nent national tendencies : the Spaniards build a convent, the Italians a church, the Dutch an exchange, the English a for- tress, and the French a theatre or a dancing-hall. Cato re- gretted that he had made three great mistakes in the course of his life : the first was, to have intrusted his wife with a secret; the second, that he had ridden when he might have travelled on foot ; and the third, that he had spent one day in idleness. What do you think of last night's lecture? Not much ; the orator was eloquent, but not instructive. It is often the case that to lectures may be applied the proverb, " Great cry and little wool." How did my teacher like my French com- position ? He did not like it much ; he said that you had written better ones, and he hopes that the composition you are going to write to-morrow will be better than any of the others. Lord Bacon says that in counsels it is good to see dangers, but in execution it is better not to see them at all, except they be very great. "Walpole affirms that nations are most commonly saved by their worst men, because the virtuous are too scrupulous to attempt to arouse the people against their tyrants. The voice of the people is likened to the voice of God ; for it has been observed that an universal opinion has an extraordinary power in its prognostications, so that it seems to have a secret vir- tue of foretelling its own happiness or misfortune. Beware of everything which may do harm, and can do you no good ; con- sequently, in the presence or absence of another, never say with- out necessity anything which may displease him. Remember, at the same time, that it is foolish to make enemies without a purpose, and that civility costs nothing and buys everything. DERIVATION OP WORDS. IGl LESSON L. DERIVATION OF WORDS, continued. 340. Words which originate from other words of the same language are mainly verbs derived from nouns ; as, cantare from canto, or from an adjective ; illustrare from illustre, or from a preposition ; aj> 2)ressare from presso. 341. Sometimes nouns and adjectives are derived from verbs ; as, adoraziojie, adorabile, from adorare, 342. By prefixing a letter or a preposition to the primitive word, many of the Italian words assume a dijQferent meaning. Almost all these prefixed letters and prepositions can be illustrated in connection with the verb mettere, from which alone twenty-four verbs have been formed ; as. Am-mettere. Com-mettere. Com-pro-meitere. Di-metlere. Bis-mettere. E-mettere. Fram-mettere. Im-pro-mettcre. Infra-mettere. Inter -mettere. Intro-mettere. 0-mettere. Per-mettere. Preter-mettere. Pro-mettere. Ri' com-mettere. Ri-mettere. Rim-pro-mettere. Ri-som-mettere. S-mettere. Som-mettere. Soito-meitere. Spro-mettere. Tras-meitere. 340. It is to be observed that dis or s prefixed to a verb gives to it an opposite meaning j as, Pregiare ... To appreciate. JDis-pregiare . . To undervalue. Cucire .... To sew. S-cucire .... To unsew. Some of the verbs have dis or s in their primitive forma- N. B tions ; as, Scrivere. Spargere. Distinguere. Discorrere, 162 MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH, 344. Hi prefixed to a verb expresses the repeti- tion of the same action, and corresponds to the English again; as, Leggere To read. Hileggere , . To read again. Dire To say. Ridire ... To say again. 342. Hi prefixed to a verb has, sometimes, the meaning of reaction, opposition ; as, Mandare . . To send. Rimandare . To send back. Dire .... To say. Ridire ... To oppose with words. N. B. — Ri is often the radical of primitive words ; as, Rimare, to rhyme. Rimanere, to remain. MAXIMS AND FIGUKES OF SPEECH. Slare colle mani in mano. To remain with hand in hand. TJn fiore non fa primavera. . , „ „ -, , , ^ „ , , , I One swallow does not make a One flower does not make a I j- To stand idle. summer, spring. Tener V anima coi denti. 1 t h f hi 1 Id f If To hold the soul by the teeth, i Gonfiare legate^ } To be puffed up. To inflate the cheeks. ) ^ ^ Stringersi nelle spalle. \ To decline compliance by a To shrug the shoulders. ) shrug of the shoulders. Abhassare le spalle. "I To submit patiently to what To drop the shoulders. X cannot be helped. Darsi della scare sul piede. To cut one's own foot with the axe. Metier gli occhi addosso ad uno. To place the eyes on one. Far tanto di cuore* To make so big a heart. To bite one's own nose off. j- To look on one with affection, j- To rejoice greatly. * In this expression both hands are stretched forward so as to form a circle. EXAMPIES AND EXERCISE. 163 EXAMPLES. I am told that he is here. Mi si dice che egli e gut He thinks so too. Effli pensa anche cost. Let this book be oflfered to him. Che gli si presenti questo libro. Go and see him to-morrow. Andate a vederlo domani. EXERCISE XLLX. I am told that Mr. B. has bought a little cottage at the sea- shore, in a very remote place, about two hundred miles from the city, and that he is determined to give up society and the world. Can I believe that a man so ambitious as he is could ever be happy in solitude and retirement ? I am told so ; but I believe only those things which I see with my own eyes. It is diflBcult to believe that a man who has always had an eye to the main chance would, all at once, give up all his schemes of life. I am inclined to think that he has been disappointed in some of his anticipations. I think so too ; I give no credit to those who prate of loving quiet, and of giving up business because they are weary of ambition ; for they almost always think otherwise in their hearts ; if they are reduced to a private and quiet life, it is either through necessity or folly. AVe see examples of this every day. Let the least chance of greatness be offered to such men, and they will forsake the quiet they boast about so loudly, and rush upon it as furiously as fire does on dry wood. In a free country every man is bound to show his devotion and attachment to the laws he has adopted, and to the magistrates he has elected. This is not to be required from a man who lives under despotism. Life is a book of which man has read only one page, if he has seen only his native country. A man must have the good sense to conform himself to the usages of the people among whom he lives. In a republic men speak much and suffer little ; but under despotism they suffer much and can speak but little. If you have nothing to do, I wish you would go and visit our neighbor, because he is in trouble, and if no one lends him a helping hand, he will undoubtedly be forced to beg. I cannot go now ; I will try to go there next week, if I have time. I am afraid that if you go there next week you will find him starved to death, and then, with all your generosity, you would be of no use to him. 164 FORMATION OF WORDS. LESSON LI FORMATION OF WORDS. 343. It has been observed, from the preceding lessons, that Italian words, with few exceptions, end in a vowel, and that o is the letter characteristic of the masculine, as a and u of the feminine, and i of the plural. 344. The following remarks are here added, for the correctness of the nse of some of the terminations : 1. Abstract nouns are principally formed by add- ing to the adjective the termination td or ezza ; as, Povertcty falsita, felicita, from povero, falso, felice. Bianchezza, dolcezza, grandezza, from bianco, dolce, grande. 2. The termination ione denotes an active state, and is generally added to words derived from verbs j it corresponds to the English tion; as, Spedizione, nutrizioney from spedire^ nutrire. 3. The termination ento denotes a passive state, or moral affections ; as, JVutrimentOt armamento, contento, spavento. 4. The termination tore expresses the cause; as, CrealorCy pittorcy scrittore. 5. The termination tura expresses the effect ; as, Creaiuray piituray scritiura. 6. The termination ata is used for words express- ing a collective number of persons, or a contiriua tion of a period of time ; as, Armaia, borgata, giornatay noltata. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. 1G5 7. It is also used to express a hloiv, or a thrust with; as, Bastonatay coltellata, pedata. 8. If the collective number of persons is homoge- neous, the termination eria is used ; as, Fanteria, artigleria, cavalleria 9. This termination is also used to express local- ity; as, Libreria, osteriut spezieria. 10. The termination abile is chiefly used to form adjectives derived from the verbs of the first conju- gation; as, Cantabile, amabiUy from cantare, amare. MAXBIS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. Dare un calcio ai heni del mondo. 1 To give a kick to the good of To give up society and the world. I To beg. the world. Tendere la mano a qualcuno. ) m i j i i • ■, \ To put forth the hand to one. I ^^ ^'^^ ^^" ^ helpmg-hana. Tendere la mano. To stretch forth the hand. Toccare una cosa con mano. To touch a thing with one's j- To see with one's own eyes. own hand. J Far la zuppa nel paniere. )^ i i . i .., ._, , fil • xi 7 1 0. r lo make bricks without straw. To make the soup in the basket. ) Rompere le nova nel paniere. 1 ^o prevent the accomplishment To Wk the eggs in one's bas- | ^^ ^ ^^^.^^^ ^^^^j^ completed. J)ar pane a chi non ha piu denti. To give bread to one who has no \ To give assistance too late, longer teeth. 166 EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. EXAMPLES. You will find this room comforta- Vol troverete questa stanza con* ble, as well as the other. fortabile come V altra. It is very easily done. Pub farsi facilissimamente. You should do this, as it is indis- Voi dovreste farlo, essejidovi iu' pensable and useful to you. dispensabile ed utile. The difficulty is to do this well. La difficolta sta nel farlo bene. EXERCISE L. Men are free under a republican government ; they are slaves under the rule of despotism ; yet they are equal under despotism as well as in the republic. How can that be? It is very easily explained ; the reason is this : Under a republic men are every- thing, under despotism they are nothing. Have you studied your lesson ? Yes ; I know it, except the poetry. Is it very difficult to commit a few lines of French poetry to memory ? It would have been very easy for me to do so, if I were inclined to repeat things like a parrot ; I do not know why it is desirable to know things by heart. The teacher does not say that it is indis- pensable to know a piece of poetry by heart, but he thinks that those who have a good memory should exercise it, as it is profit- able and useful to them ; and, beside, he does not like to have scholars in his school who cannot recite or declaim without look- ing at the book, which he thinks (to be) a sign of stupidity. But, suppose that they are stupid, will they become wise in commit- ting to memory half a page of Virgil or Milton? No, they will not become wise, but this is a sure indication of their intel- lectual capacity. Allow me to tell you that I am not of your opinion, because I know by experience that many men are intel- ligent and have a great deal of sense, and yet they could not com- mit to memory two lines from Shakspeare, were they to try ten years. Is it not true that every man sees the objects with the color of the spectacles which he wears ? Yes, it is true ; and so every man should endeavor to wear a pair of good, clear, trans- parent spectacles. The difficulty is to know where to buy them. A man has no greater enemy than himself, because all the evil and excess of trou])le he experiences proceed from nothing but his own short-sightedness. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. 167 LESSON LII. j- To be thick-headed. ^ MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. Masticare le parole. ■) To masticate the words. J ^o think before you speak. Cojioscere il pane dai sassi, ) rr, i , , , mi 1, J r i. c ^^ know what 's what. To know bread from a stone. ) Avere il cervello nelle calcagna. \rn -, To have the brain in the heels. J ^ ^" Mettere cervello. ") m i ,p , , . >- To become wise. lo put brain. ) Aver la testa dura. To have a hard head. Andar colla testa nel sacco . ")„ ^ ' i. <.!• vr^i To go with the head in the bag. / J & 7* Sapere una cosa a mente. ") m i ,-i . •, •, m , XV • T. .J r J-O know a thing by heart. To know a thing by mind. ) *^ *' Andare afronte scoperta. To go with one's brow uncov- ered. Far fronte a qualcuno. *» To make front to one. ]" ^o oppose any one. Lavorare ad occhi chiusi. -» _ ,,,.-,, ny 1 -xu 1 1 J. r To work Mindly, lo work with one s eyes shut, j •' Guardare colla coda deW occhio. ^ To look with the tail of the eye. / ^^ ^^^* «^^^^P'« ^y^«- E mcglio ogrji Vuovo che domani ' la gallina. Better an egg to-day than the chicken to-morrow. Toccar sempre lo stesso tasto. Xo play always upon the same j- To harp on the same string note. To have nothing to be ashamed of. A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush. 168 SYNONYMS, SYNONYMS. SERVANT, SERVJTORE, SERVO. Servitore is the man who is actually, and of his own will, in the service of another man . Servo is the man in bondage. In a despotic government all men are servi, but many of the servi have servitori. In the United States of America, we find in the North only servitori; in the South, servitori and servi. At the end of a letter we would write. Your servant, vostro servo, as a mere matter of etiquette ; but in saying vostro servi- tore we should express more devotion and a servile attachment. DEVOTION, DEVOZIONE, DIVOZIONE. Devozione is the state of being dedicated to a particular purpose. Divozione is the yielding of the heart and affection, with rev- erence and piety, to the Supreme Being. We show devozione when we sacrifice our happiness for the welfare of our fellow-man. We show divozione when we perform all the duties and injunctions of our religion. We say that a man is divoto di Dio, and devoto alia patria. EXAMPLES. I do not know the manner in lo non so come qucsto libra d which this book is printed. siampato. My friend is permitted to go out Sipermelte al mio arnica di uscire •whenever he likes quanda vuole. Ihey part but they will meet Si separanoy ma si uniranna di again. nuavo. If you permit so much money to Se vai permeltete che gli si dia be given to him, I do not know tanio denara, io von so che cosa what to think (about it). debba pensarne. EXERCISE. 1G9 EXERCISE LI. Have you ever heard of the Count of Carmagnola? No ; but I should like to hear something about him. Well, he was one of the great captains who flourished at the time of the Ital- ian republics. Being in the service of Venice, whose dominions he had largely extended through his bravery and military skill, the patricians, jealous of his popularity, and fearing that it might prove injurious to the liberties of the country, condemned him to death. Alessandro Manzoni, the celebrated novelist, generally known in the literary world by his historical romance ^'I Promessi Sposi,^^ has written a tragedy on the subject. Will you be so kind as to make me acquainted with the manner in which this tragedy is conducted ? I would do it with pleasure, but I prefer to make you translate some parts of the tragedy, and invite you to read the original by yourself. I am very much obliged to you. I wish to begin with Manzoni, because ho is a writer whose main object, in all his productions, is to develop the best part of human nature, and because he inspires every one with pure and noble sentiments of morality and religion. The following piece, which you are going to translate, is the last scene of the tragedy, in which the count, a few moments before his execution, is permitted to see his wife and daughter, and part from them to meet again in a better world. He speaks thus : "0, unhappy ones ! Heaven knows that these last moments are terrible to me only for your sakes ! I am accustomed to contemplate death, and to await it calmly. Alas ! for you only have I need of courage now ; and you, you will not take it from me ; is it not so ? When God permits misfortune to fall on the head of the good man, He gives with it the courage to bear it patiently. Let, then, your courage now be equal to our misfor- tune. Even this last embrace is a gift from Heaven. Let us rejoice for these last moments, which are sacred. It is true that the patricians have done us great wrong, but among the evils there is a great joy — the joy of pardoning the offences. ' ' I must stop here, because I know that you have many other things to do, and I do not like to fatigue you too much with a long exercise ; I will continue in my next lesson. I am much obliged to you. 170 MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. LESSON LIII MAXIMS AND FIGUEES OF SPEECH. I To keep one to his duty. Tenere qudlcuno in tono. To keep one in tone. Volere hallare e cantare. To wish to dance and sing. Tal sonata tal hallata. To such a tune such a dance. Non aver da far cantare un cieco. "l To try to row one way and look i another. \To such a question such an ) answer. Not to possess enough to make 1 ^^* *^ ^^^^ ^^«"g^ *^ ^^^ «^^* a blind man sing. J for one's porridge. In capo di dodici mesi. •) At the head of twelve months. | ^* *^^ ^^^ ^^ *^^1^« "^«^*^«- Dare il capo d^anno. To give the head of the year. Far una cosa da capo. To make a thing from head. JEsser come pane e cacio. To be like bread and cheese. Tenere la mestola. To hold the pot-stick. Non esser pane pei denti di qual- cuno. Not to be bread for one's teeth. La farina del diavolo va tutta in crusca. The flour of the devil all goes to bran. Cascare il cacio sui maccheroni. To have cheese falling on the maccaroni. j- To wish a happy new year. I To begin again. \ To be inseparable friends. y To rule the roost. To be out of one's reach. Ill-gotten gains bring no good To be unexpectedly fortunate. SYNONYMS. 171 SYNONYMS. LABOR, FATICA, TRAVAGLIO. Fatica ih the effect of lavoro. It is sometimes used in the meaning of lavoro and opera, to express the difficulty under which we labored to accomplish the lavoro or opera. "We may have lavoro without fatica, but with fatica there is always associated lavoro Travaglio is neither /a^ica, nor opera, nor lavoro, but only a painful-sensation. It has been used by some of the classics for lavoro or fatica, to express hard and exhausting labor. PROUD, iSUPERBO. HAUGHTY, ALTIERO. These two words have in Italian a contrary meaning to that which they convey in English. Altiero comes from high, elevated, and is applied to a man who scorns everything mean and base. Superbo is applied to a man who has a general contempt for every person or thing. A man superbo considers himself superior to other men, and mingles with them only to keep them in submission. A man altiero sets himself apart from the vulgar, and asso- ciates only with those who can sympathize with him. We praise a woman when we call her altiera. "VYe blame a woman when we call her superba. EXAMPLES. Assist me, and let me not be de- Assistetemi, e nan mi lasciate prived of your valuable help. privo del vosfro valevole aiuto. I see him writing in the other Lo vedo scrivere ncW ultra piC" small room. cola stanza. Trust in me ! Abbi fiducia in me! Are you working for me? State lavorando per me ? How could I have slept, had I Come avrei io potuto dormire se not prayed before my guard- nan avessi prima pregato il ian angel to send to me sweet mio angelo cusiode di mandarmi Bleep ! un dolce sonno ! 172 EXERCISE. EXERCISE LII. Did you not promise me to continue to-day the piece which we commenced in our last lesson ? Yes, I did (promise it). It is so interesting and so affecting, that I long to hear the end of it. I am ready to comply with your wish, but I have forgotten where we left off. It was where the count says, " The joy of pardoning the offences." 0, yes, I remember ; let us continue. " If death were invented by man, it would be detestable and insupportable; but death comes from Heaven, and Heaven accompanies it with Buch consolation as no man can give or take — the comfort that there is a reward for the just. Listen to my last words ! I know (that) they fall bitterly on your hearts, but they will perhaps one day alleviate your grief. You, my wife, live, and conquer your misfortune ; live, and let not this unhappy orphan be deprived of both father and mother. Fly from Venice, and reconduct your daughter to your relatives. She is of their own blood, and you, you yourself were once too dear to them. If the love which they bore you was in part lessened when you became the wife of their enemy, it will be revived, now that you go to them unhappy and without him, the object of their impla- cable hatred, who in a few moments will cease to exist. And thou, my daughter, whose spirit came so many times to cheer my soul in the roaring of battles, why art thou now casting down thy head like a tender flower? 0, the threatening storm is raging, thou tremblest, and thy heart seems ready to break with the intensity of anguish ! I feel thy warm tears falling abundantly over me, yet I cannot wipe them away ! Mathelda, my child, art thou appealing to me for help ? Alas ! thy father can do nothing for thee ; but there is a Father for the forsaken ; thou knowest it ; trust in Him, and live. He has certainly des- tined thee for tranquil, if not happy days. How could He have poured out all this overwhelming torrent of anguish in the morning of thy life, had He not preserved all his mercy for thy remaining years? Live and console thy mother. 0, that she might one day make thee the happy wife of a worthy husband." Now that you have translated these few lines in plain prose, I would direct you to read the same piece in the original. You will find it on page 227. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. 173 LESSON LIV. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. Rispettare il cane -per amore del^ padrone. 1 To have respect to the dog for f ' ^ °* the love of the master. J Lavar la testa aW asino. -^ To try to make a silk purse oui To wash the head of an ass. j of a sow's ear. Aver grilli in capo. "i To have grasshoppers in the I To be whimsical. head. J Raddrizzare le gamhe at cani. \ To make straight the dog's legs, j ° Aauzzare gli occhi. ^ r^, i i , ,p 1 XI ^ io look sharply at anything. To sharpen the eyes. J i j j ei Plantar gli occhi in faccia ad^ uno. To plant the eyes in the face of • one. Parlare a quattro occhi. % To speak at four eyes. | ^o speak tete-a-tete. Lontano dagli occhi lontano dal cuore. Far from the eyes, far from the ^^* of sight, out of mind. heart. Esser V occhio dritto di uno. ^ To be the right eye of one. | ^o be the right-hand man. Perder rf' occhio qualcuno. ^ To lose from the eye. j ^o lose sight of one. In bocca chiusa non entra mosca. \ Nothing is obtained without No fly enters a shut mouth. j" eflPort. Esser colla morte in bocca ^ •\ To be with death in the mouth. J ^o be at the point of death. To confront boldly. 171: SYNONYMS. SYNONYMS. COMPOSITION, COMPONIMENTO, COMPOSIZIONE, Componimento is a production of the mind. Composizione is a mixture of material substances. llie poet makes componimenti, the apothecary composizioni. Using these words figuratively, we say composizione when we speak of a production already finished, and componimento when not yet done. We made a good composizione yesterday, and we hope to make a better componimento to-morrow. GRATITUDE, GRATITUDINE, RICONOSCENZA. Graiitudine is a noble and generous sentiment of the soul. Riconoscenza is a duty. We show riconoscenza for a benefit by repaying it doubly and then we may forget it. We show our gratitudine by a constant and sincere attach- ment to the person who has benefited us. The man who feels riconoscenza, and is unable to indemnify his benefactor, is always in a state of torment. The man who feels gratitudine cherishes always the hope of seeing his benefactor happy and prosperous ; and, if unable to contribute to it, he shows his sincere wish by a word, a sigh, or a tear. EXAMPLES. I am obliged to go away. Son costretto di partire. I am very sorry to hear you J\Ii dispiace inoltissimo di sentire complain of your friend so bit- che voi vi dolete del vostro amico terly. si amaramente. My friend is to be found at the Mio fratcllo pub trovarsi alia library. libreria. You have my best wishes. Ve lo desidero di cuore. Without further delay. Senza piu dilungarmi. Ihey came forward from either Essi si avanzarono daW una « side. dalV altra parle. EXERCISE. 175 EXERCISE LIII. Where could I get Manzoni's works? I cannot tell you ; but, if you are desirous to obtain them, I am sure that you will suc- ceed in finding them. I must have his works, at any rate, even were I obliged to write to Europe. I am very glad to hear you Bay so ; and, as I see you so well disposed to become acquainted with this great Italian writer, I will now give you a few more specimens. I am extremely obliged to you. I will try to make you translate into prose a chorus which is to be found in the same tragedy of "// Conte di Carmagnola.^^ It is too long for one exercise, but . . . Do not be alarmed because I say that it is too long ; I will divide it into three exercises. I am not alarmed, sir ; but I have but little time for my Italian lesson, and I wish to make my translation thoroughly, and without mistakes, if possible. You have my best wishes, and I begin without further delay : " The sound of a trumpet is heard from the right. Another trumpet answers from the left. The fields trodden by armed men reecho from either side. Here a banner is seen advancing, and there another unfolded banner. Behold an army, proceeding in formidable array ; and behold another, which is steadily advancing to meet the foe. Already the ground which separated them has disappeared ; they are face to face, they fight sword in hand, they thrust them in each other's breast ; though the blood flows freely from the already gaping wounds, yet they redouble their blows with unrelenting fury. Who are these warriors ? In which of the two armies are to be found the strangers who dared to come to subdue this beautiful land, and on which side are the Italians who have sworn to save their country or die? Alas ! they all speak the same language, the common lineage is imprinted on the brow of each ; they were all born in this land, which they are now staining with their bl3od ; this beautiful land, which nature has set apart, and sur- rounded with the Alps and the sea." You will hear the con- tinuation of this chorus in the next lesson. I am very much obliged to you, sir ; because, although this exercise is extremely interesting, I cannot give more time to it, being obliged to get ready for a ball. Go and enjoy yourself. 170 MAXIMS AND FIGURES OP SPEECU. LESSON LV. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. [- To be a great talker. To speak with timidity and caution. Esser largo di hocca. To be with a large mouth. Favellare a hocca stretta. To speak with a mouth half shut. Avere il cuore in hocca. ^ To have the heart in the mouth, j ^^ ^® candid. Lasciar la lingua a casa. ^ To remain silent, or uncommu To leave the tongue at home, j nicative. La lingua hatte dove il dente One is apt to talk of what in terests him the most. duole. The tongue strikes where the tooth aches. Bimanere a denti asdutti. To be left with dry teeth. Fare huon viso. To make a good face. Geitar sul viso una cosa. To throw a thing in the face. Romper si il collo. To break one's neck. Scrivere con huon inchiostro. To write in good ink. Non mi da il cuore di . , i _ XT . . . i-u u A A r -Not to dare to . . . Not to me gives the heart to . . J Far cuore. \ To make heart. | To give courage. Una cosa da strappare il cuore. \ A thing which overwhelms ui A thing to snatch the heart. ) with grief. ) To be disappointed in one's J expectations. \ To be pleased with something ; / to welcome. f To throw a thing in one's teeth, r To be seriously injured. I" To write in strong terms. SYNONYMS. 177 SYNONYMS. LEAF, FROND A, FOGLIA. Foglie are the leaves of a plant without branches. Fronde are the loaves of a tree, or a shrub. We pluck a fronda from an oak-tree. We pluck a foglia from lettuce. The poets are crowned with fronde, and not foglie, of laurel. 2^" We may say foglie or fronde of a tree ; but we must always say una foglia, and never una fronda, of lettuce. PURITY, PURITA, PUREZZA. Moral and abstract objects have purita. Physical and natural objects have purezza. The wine, water, and gold, have purezza, and not purifa The mind, thought, and aspirations, have purita, and not purezza. TERROR, TERRORS, SPAVENTO. Terrore is the superlative of timore. Spavento is the superlative of paura. Terrore is accompanied with grief. Spavento is accompanied with wonder. A great calamity causes terrore. An imminent danger causes spaventf . EXAMPLES. This is not my property. Questo non mi appartiene. My book is covered with dust. II mio libro e coperto di polvere. I saved myself by flight. Mi salvai colla fuga. They laid down their arms. Eglino cessero le armi. My books are lessened in num- Imiei libri sono scemati di nw ber. viero. 178 EXERCISE, EXERCISE LTV When did Manzoni live? Manzoni was bom in the yeai 1784, and he is still living. I hope so, at least ; but let us not lose any time, but continue our chorus, because I remember very well where we left off last time. I am ready. " But who of them was the first to unsheathe the sacrilegious sword, and plunge it into his brother's breast? What is the exciting cause of that bitter strife ? Alas, they know not (it) ! they are come here without animosity, to inflict death or to die ; they are sold to leaders, and they fight without knowing why. 0, misfor- tune ! But have these foolish warriors qd mothers, no wives ? Why do they not go to snatch their husbands and sons from that ignoble contest? Why do not the old men, filled with the peaceful thoughts of the grave, endeavor to appease that mad- dening crowd with kind and softening words ? Alas ! they are unmoved, and speak of their brothers slain, and their cities burned, with that indifference with which the husbandman, sit- ting at the door of his cottage, points to a whirlwind which is devastating fields that are not his property ; the children are attentively listening to their mothers, who speak to them of hatred and revenge ; the women are making a show of the necklaces and girdles which their husbands and lovers have taken from the bereaved women of their conquered brothers. The field is already covered with dead warriors ; the noise increases, the fury redoubles. One of the armies, lessened in number, is obliged to retreat, and the soldiers, in despair, endeavor to save their lives by flight, and disband ; but, whilst the cavalry pursues them, and they are spread over the vast plain like the grain when thrown into the air by the winnowing- fan, a troop of armed men attack the fugitives in front ; they are obliged to lay down their arms amidst the shouts of the victors, which silence the laments of the dying warriors. A courier is despatched in great haste. As he passes through the villages, all hasten to ask for the good- news. Have you forgotten whence he comes ? Can you ever expect good news ? Hear the vile news he brings : " Brothers have slain their brothers ! " I think that this is enough for to-day, and so I stop here, to finish thif Bad recital in our next lesson. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. 179 LESSON LVI. To forget; not to care for a thing. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. VoUare lespalle. | ^^ withdraw, to retreat. To turn the shoulders. ) Buttarsi un affare dietro le spalle. To throw a thing behind one's shoulders. Fare spalla a gualcuno. 1 m i i „ , 1 ,, ^ ^ To back one ; to assist one. To make shoulder for one. ) Parlar soito voce. '\ „. , . . ^ To whisper. To speak under voice. } Mi cadono le hraccia. ") t j- j ^ I am discouraged. My arms fall to me. ) Misurar tutto collo stesso hraccio. 1 To measure everything with the [ Not to allow any distinction, same arm. J Poriare uno in palma di mano. 1 ™ , , , . . • ^^^ „ . ^ , , _ , I To hold one in great consider*- To carry one in the palm of the f . • hand. J Essere un uomo alia mano. To be a man at the hand. Dar V ultima mano ad un la- "j voro. \ To put on the finishing touch. To give the last hand to a work. J Avere una cosa fra la mani. ^ To have a thing among the \ To have a thing handy. hands. J Fare una cosa a man salva. | ^o do a thing without danger. To do a thing at sure hand. J Un luogo fuor di mano. | ^ ^^^^^^ ^^ 1^^^^ A place out of hand. j V To be kind and affable. 180 SYNONYMS. SYNONYMS. LIE, MENZOGNA, BUGIA. Menzogna is an error. Bugia is a crime. If we make believe a thing in jest and for a pastime, the lie is menzogna^ and not bugia. If we take advantage from what we make believe, the lie is bugia, and not menzogna. We say, generally, una piccola menzogna and una gran bugia. The untruth asserted to benefit others at the injury of our- selves is menzogna, and not bugia. Tasso has ennobled this word by calling it magnanimous. " Magnanima menzogna / " he exclaims, when Sofronia, in order to save all the Christians from the wrath of the king of the Turks, makes him believe that she had taken and burned the image of the Virgin. LIGHT, LUME, LUCE. Luce is the cause. Lume is the efiect. The moon sends down lume, and not luce. The sun sends down luce, and not lume. Lume is generally used for those bodies which throw light on something, such as a candle, a lantern. Luce is generally used for luminous and shining objects, such as a star, a fire-fly. WORK, OPERAy LAVORO. Opera is the production of the mind. Lavoro is applied to anything accomplished by the hand. The creation of the world is the opera of God. The coat I wear is lavoro of my tailor. TO GO OUT, USCIRE, SORTIRE. Uscire is used to express the act of departing from any place Sortire, in the meaning of going out, is limited to military purposes, and only used to express the sudden rushing out of a body of troops from a fortified place to attack the besiegers. EXAMPLES AND EXERCISE. 181 EXAMPLES. They descended the mountain in Scesero dalla montagna di gran great haste, and fled. fretta^ e fuggirono. What would you gain in so afflict- Che cosa potreste guadagnare af- ing yourself? Jliggcndovi tanto? This is the reason why I am here. Kcco pcrchc son qui. EXERCISE LV. " Tho temple already reechoes with hymns and songs ; homi- cidal hearts are offering thanksgivings which Heaven can but abhor. Meanwhile, the stranger appears from the summit of the Alps, sees the warriors slain, and counts them with cruel joy. Hasten, Italians ! away with feastings ! return to your banners, assemble together, the stranger is coming ! he is near I Victors, you are now feeble and few, and this is the reason why he descends the Alps, and challenges you in those same fields in which you, brothers, have slain your brothers. 0, unhappy Italy ! fatal land, which seemeth too small for thy children, who are never united and in accord, bow now to the stranger ; it is now that the judgment of Divine Justice begins over thee ; an enemy whom thou hast not provoked must now sit at thy table, eat thy bread, and rule over thee. He, also, the stranger, is foolish in so much rejoicing. Has a nation ever enjoyed happi- ness for having inflicted wrong and outrages on other nations ? Suffering is not reserved for the vanquished alone ; the momentary joy of the impious is sooner or later changed into woe. If Divine Justice does not always strike the oppressor whilst in the height of his pride, it marks him, watches and waits ; it reaches him, at last, at the point of death. The image of God is reflected alike on the brow of every man ; in every part of tho globe where we may meet, we are all brothers, all children of the same redemption, all bound with the same compact of mutual love. Cursed be the man who disregards this compact ; cursed be he who takes advantage of the feeble in sorrow and misfortune ; cursed oe he who afiiicts the soul of man, which is an immortal spirit." You can now read the original, which you will find at the end of the book, and if you have a good memory I would advise you i.0 learn it by heart. 1.82 MAilMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. LESSON XVII, MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. Non va mat came senza osso. •) ^ , . , m, , a I. -^.u 4.U « r Every rose has its thorn. There 's no flesh without bones. ) '" Salvar la pelle. ^ To escape by the skin of one's To save the skin. J teeth. Ne va la vita. ") o i T. ^'c^ c -i. h Life IS at stake. It goes life for it. j Guadagnarsi la vita. ^ ^ , ,. . ^ . , T^ ^ To get one's livmff. To gain one s life. J Varsi vita e buon tempo. "I To give to one's self life and [ To enjoy one's self, good time. J II fine corona r opera. ^ ^^^ , n xi i. j n ,„/ ^ f , h All 's well that ends well. The end crowns the work. ) Toccare il cielo col dito. "j To touch heaven with the fin- j- To be at the height of fortune ger. J JRisoIvere su due piedi. -) _, . ^, ^ ^ _, , J. n . h To resolve on the spot, at once. To resolve on two feet. ) ^ Avere il piede in due staffe. i To have the foot in two stir- Po have two strings to ones rups. 1 ''o^- Non sapere quanti piedi entrino in uno stivale. Not to know how many feet go in a boot. Mcltersi la mano al cuore. "i To appeal to conscience for ju§- To put one's hand on his heart, j tico. Lasciar del pelo in una cosa. | ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ To lose some hair in a thing. ) Not to know enough to go io when it rains. SYNONYMS AND EXAMPLES. 183 SYNONYMS. NEW, NUOVO, NUVELLO. Nuovo has reference to use, or to the time in which an object has been used. Novella has reference to age, or to the time in which an object is made. We put on a now coat un ahito nuovo, though it was made ten years ago. (j^" If newly made, we call it also abito nuovo, because we express the time in which it is used, and not the time in which it was made. We say un novella amicOy Valba noueZ/a, because we have refer- ence only to time. SHAME, ONTA, VERGOGNA. Onta is an injury, accompanied with contempt. Yergogna is a demonstration of modest ingenuousness We are ready to revenge, if we feel onta. We are ready to reform, if we feel vergogna. EXAMPLES. To turn a thing into ridicule. Mettere una cosa in ridicolo. To meet with great success. Avere gran successo. It is customary here to sing after E qui costume di cantare dopo breakfiist. aver fatto colazione. I have a great desire for money. Ho gran desiderio di denaro. They ran with lightning speed. Corrono colla rapidita del baleno. EXERCISE LVI. Count Vittorio Alfieri was born at Asti, in Piedmont, in the year 1749. Slow in his progress, he had arrived at the age of twenty-four without knowing even the elements of his native tongue. The classical heroism of the Greeks and Romans inspired him with a taste for poetry and poetical composition. After some imperfect attempts, he wrote a tragedy, Cleopatra, 184 EXERCISE. and attached to it a little piece like a farce, in which he endeav- ored to turn his own tragedy into ridicule. But the pieces met with great success, and he applied himself to cultivate his dra- matic taste, and in the course of six years produced twenty tragedies, which filled the void of the national literature. Eng- land has a Shakspeare, France a Racine, Spain a Calderon, Italy an Alfieri. The power of his tragedies results chiefly from the energetic sincerity of the poet, who has embodied his own pas- sion and feeling in hjs writings, offering simplicity in the plot, truthfulness in the characters, and vehemence, elegance, and harmony, in the comprehensive diction. The following extract is taken from the tragedy Oreste, in which Py lades relates the supposed death of his friend : " It w'as customary in Crete to renew games and sacrifices to Jupiter every fifth year. Orestes, animated by a desire for fame, and compelled by his restless vigor, went to that shore with his inseparable friend, Py lades. There, longing for honor and glory, he entered the wide arena in a light car, to obtain the noble palm for rapid steeds ; and there, too intent for victory, he lost his life. Too fierce, heedless, and impatient, now, with a threatening voice, he pressed forward his ill-trained coursers, and now, with a whip stained with blood, lashed them so vigorously that they flew beyond the assigned limit, more mettlesome as they were more swift. Already regard- less of the bridle, and the cries with which he seeks in vain to quiet them, they emit fire from their nostrils ; their shaggy manes float in the air, and, wrapped in a thick cloud of dust, they run at their own will over that vast plain with a lightning speed. The tortuous whirlings of the chariot bring everywhere fright, terror, discomfiture, and death, until, the fervid axle striking with violent shock against a marble column, Orestes, being overthrown, fell, and, di'aggcd by the reins, he stained the ground with his blood. Py lades ran to his help, but in vain ! Orestes breathed his last sigh in his arms." Alfieri died in Florence, in the year 1803, and was buried in the church of Santa Croce, wliere a splendid monument is to be seen, at the side of Machiavelli, Michelangelo, and Galileo. His works are printed in twenty-two volumes, quarto. (See the original of the above extract, page 232.) MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. 185 LESSON LVIII. MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. Cercare il pelo nelV novo. To seek for hair on an egg. Non tor cere un pelo ad uno. Not to twist one hair of one. II lupo cangia il pelo ma non il vizio. The wolf changes his hair, but not his vice. Chi dorme non prende pesci. He who sleeps takes no fish. Non entrare in un affare. Not to enter into an aflPair. Mentre V erha cresce il cavallo se ' ne muore. While the grass grows the horse dies. Star fresco. To be fresh. Star punta per punta. To stay point for point. Star lontano. To stay far. Aver la testa altrove. To have the head somewhere [• To think of other things else. Fare il santo. •\ To make the saint. ] ^o ?% the saint Dar Vanello. 1 To give the ring. | To marry. 9 "I To be excessively particular in j everything. Y Not to touch a hair of the head. Vice may change its garb, but remains the same. 'J The sleeping fox catches no J poultry. ) Not to have anything to do ) with an affair. Make hay while the sun shines. ■ While the doctors dispute the patient dies. T To be ruined. j- To be always at variance. ]- To dwell afar off. 18G SYNONYMS AND EXAMPLES. SYNONYMS. CRAFTY, ASTUTO, FURBO. Astuto is said of a man who seeks to obtain an object without detection. Furbo is said of a man who seeks to obtain an object by deceiving others. The man astuto is often a man of honor. The man furho is never so. The generous man may reproach the astuto for his want of frankness ; but the generous man and the astuto both agree in exposing and discarding the furbo. FIEST, PRIMO, PRIMIERO. Primo is merely an ordinal number, which is expected to be followed by second, third. Primiero is a man elevated above the others. In an army the inferior may become the first, il primiero. In a play in which we are not well entertained, we may leave at the first act, al primo atto. The president of a republic is the first of the nation, il pri- miero delta nazione; but not the first president, il primo presi- dente. EXAMPLES. The lifeless remains of my beloved La spoglia esanime del mio dilelio son. figlio. To trample under foot the insult- Calpestare la bandiera insulta- ing banner. trice. EXERCISE LVn. Torquato Tasso was born in Sorrento, near Naples, in the year 1544. Early applying himself to the study of his prede- cessors, Dante and Petrarch, and of the Latin and Greek clas- Bice, his mind soon became productive. At the age of seventeen ho wrote his Aminta, a pastoral play, full of grace, simplicity, EXERCISE. 187 and tenderness of expression, which aroused the attention and admiration of all the literati of his age, and which alone would have made his name known and respected in the Republic of Letters. But the young poet was not satisfied with his success. Endowed with a productive mind, and able to express his crea- tions in a sonorous, easy, and pathetic language, he had only need of a subject in which he could embody the intensity of his feelings, the purity of his heart, and the religious sentiment which pervaded his mind and thoughts. He consequently produced his masterly poem, Jerusalem Delivered, which immortalized his name, and added much lustre to the Italian literature. And was there, indeed, any subject which could afiford a wider field to a Christian poet with a mind like his, gifted with a fervid imag- ination ? The Saviour of the world dies for the redemption of mankind ; the land where the Divine word had difiused so many maxims of morality and religion, the sacred spot which had been sprinkled with his holy blood, was now profaned by the barbar- ous Moslem. It was not permitted to the followers of their Master to visit the dread enclosure where his lifeless remains were kept ; to fortify themselves in the new faith by the sight of those places which bear witness of His sujQfering and of His death. The whole of Europe, aroused by the voice of an enthu- siastic hermit, moves in a mass to free the land, and to deliver the brother Christians kept under the cruel yoke of a cruel des- potism. They fight desperately ; they endure with constancy and perseverance the hardship of a long and distressing war. They conquer, at last ; they trample under foot the insulting crescent ; they plant on the walls of Jerusalem the cross, as an emblem of glory and triumph, and hasten with reverence and awe to worship their own inheritance, the holy sepulchre. Nothing more pathetic, noth^gVmore sublime. The Jerusalem Delivered was by the poet dedicated to the Duke of Ferrara, Alfonzo d' Este, that ambitious despot, who, suspecting that the poem might be dedicated to some other Italian prince, rewarded the poet by keeping him for seven years in the insane hospital, and making him drink to the last drop the cup of bitterness. Tasso died in Rome, in the year 1595. His last words were^ " I am unhappy because the world is unjust." 188 MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. LESSON LIX. MAXIMS AND FIGUEES OF SPEECH. 1 To abscond. I To be at a loss, j- To run great risk. > To set on fire. Saying and things. doing are two Palmare di calcagna. To pay with one's heels. Promettere mari e monii. To promise seas and mountains. | To be prodigal of promisee. Perdere la bussola. To lose the compass. Correre una gran burr a sea. To run a great storm. Dar fuoco. To give fire. Bal detto al fatto c^ e un gran ^ tratto. From the said to the done is a great space. Avere del bene di Dio. -\ To have of the good of God. J ^^ P^^^^«« ^^^^^^^ blessings. Fare una cosa in un credo. 1 ^^ , , . ^, , ^ , ... . , ^ To do a thing ofi-hand. To do a thing m a creed. j ° Non credere al santo se nonfa il ■ miracolo. Not to believe in the saint un less he performs the mira^ Avere un viso di scomunicato, To have the look of an excom- municated person. Pigliarsela in santa face. To take it in holy peace. Andate a farvi benedire. \ Go and attend to your own Go to get yourself blessed. J business. To credit only what is apparent to the senses. om^^TTol have an ugly look r To be resigned. } SYNONYMS AND EXAMPLES. 189 SYNONYMS. TO REPEAT, RIPETERE, REPLICARE. Ripctere has the meaning of saying again what hns been said before. Beplicare has tlie meanhig of doing again what has been done before. The teacher asks us to repeat, ripeterej our lesson. We cry aloud " replica," when we wish to see again some scene in a new performance. ^* When replicare is used for words, it has the meaning of con- tradicting or opposing with words ; as, L' or dine era capriccioso, ma nessuno ardiva replicare. KELATION, RELAZIONE, RAPPORTO. Rapporto is the relation of an incident, of something which has just taken place. Relazione is the relation of a great event, or of a long journey. A corporal makes his rapporto of the discipline of his com- pany. A general in chief makes his relazione of the battle he has gained or lost, and of all the diificulties he has encountered. The relations among friends and relatives are relazioni dx amicizia, di parentela, and not rapporti. EXAMPLES. I have read many Italian ^Q^tKMMo leito molte poesie Italiane. It is generally supposed thd^^^Bjjj^ crede da tutti che egli e moll9 is very skilful. ^'^^^^ ahile. Whilst I am alive you have notli- Mentre ho vita, non avete nvlla ing to fear. da temere When I may be permitted to go Quando mi sara permesso di out, then I shall go to him. uscire, allora andro da lui. His book is still existing. // suo libro esiste tuttavla. 190 EXERCISE. EXERCISE LVm. One of the most celebrated characters in the literary world if Francis Petrarch. We are chiefly indebted to him for the res- toration of the Latin tongue to its purity. He contributed greatly to the revival of letters in Italy, and, through Italy, to the other realms of Europe. His Latin works give evidence of his abilities as a politician, theologian, and philosopher. He clothed many excellent precepts of morality with all the graces of pure and classical lauguage. Brucker says, that in reading the moral writings of Petrarch, we visit, not a barren desert of dry disputation, but a fruitful garden of elegant observations, full of the choicest flowers of literature ; yet Petrarch's fame depends now entirely on his Italian poems, a collection of about three hundred odes and sonnets, which he wrote as the light relaxations of his mind, almost exclusively given to Latin works, which were the object of his serious applications, and on which alone, it is supposed, he based all his claims to the admiration of posterity. It is Laura, that modest and sweet maiden he sees for the first time on the morning of a Good Friday, 1327 (on that day in which the sun lost all its brightness through pity for its Creator, Era il di che al sol si scoloraro per la pieta del suo Fat- tore i rai) , who inspires him, and he pours forth those beautiful verses which celebrate the accomplishments and bewail the fate of his cherished idol. Whilst Laura is alive, the charms of her person float constantly before him, and he pours forth all the sweetness of his heart in a gay and animated strain. Laura dies ; and the mourning poet does not lay aside hie harp, but the earthly passion gives way to a purer afiection, and he sings, in a solemn and hopeful tone, his Laura, as she appears to him in dreams, as he sees her in th^^mcentration of his mind, the embodiment of heavenly bliss, ^^B^ian angel constantly guid- ing him, watching over him, amW^ding him be resigned, and look with eager delight for the day in which he may be permitted to share her joy and happiness. Petrarch was born in Arezzo, in the year 1304 ; and died at his villa in Arguk, near Padua, in July, 1374. lie was found dead in his library, with his head resting on a book. The chair in which he died, and several other relics, are still existing, and are scrupulously preserved from the injuries of time. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. 191 LESSON LX. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. To be about a thing. To abound with everything. To absolve from sins. To abstain from doing a thing. To abuse the power. To be accompanied by a friend. To be acquainted with one. To address one. I'o adorn with . . . i o be affected by . . . Agitated with such a thought. "lo be amazed at a thing. To be angry with a person. To answer for a thing. To approve of a thing. To argue upon a thing. To be armed with . . . To arrive at . . . To augment in . . . Bathed with tears. To bear one a grudge. To believe in . . . To bestow upon . . . To beware of . . . To charge one with ... To be clothed with ... To come near to . . . '♦- To comply with one's wishes. To confer on . . . To confide in . . . To be contented with . , . To be copious in . . . Star facendo una cosa. Abbondare di ogni cosa, Assolvere dei peccali. Astenersi di fare una r,osa. Abusare del potere. Essere accompagnato da un amico. Conoscere uno. Favellare ad uno. Adornare di . . . Essere intenerito da , , . Agitato da un talpensiero. Esser sorpreso di una cosa. Essere sdegnato di una persona^ Render conto di una cosa. Approvare una cosa. Ragionare di una cosa Armarsi di . . . Arrivare in . . . Accrescersi di . . . Bagnato di lagrime Voter male ad uno. Dar fede a . . . Confcrire a . . . Guardarsi di . Accusare uno di Esser vestito di . Avvicinarsi a . . . Conformarsi al volere di un9 Confer ire a . . . Fidarsi di . . . Esser contento di . . . Abbondare di . . . 192 IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS AND EXAMPLES. Covered with . . . Crowned with . . . Dazzled with . . . fo delight in . . . Co demand of . . . To be disappointed in . . . I'o be displeased with . . . To be enraged at . . . To face one. To fall in love with . . . To feed on . . . To fill with . . . To fortify with . . . To furnish one's self with . . To be as good as one's word. To have done. To hinder from . . . To inflame one with . . . To kiss one's hand. To be laden with . . . To laugh at . . . To lavish upon . . . To let one know. To load with . . . To look at a thing. To look for a thing. To look upon a thing. To lose sight of one. Coperto di . . . Coronato di , . . Abbagliato da . . , Dilettarsi di . . . Domandare a . . . Esser deluso di . . . Esser disgustato di . . . Essere arrabiato contra . Far f route ad uno. Innamorarsi di . . . Nutrisi di . . . Empiere di . . . Munire di . . . Provvedersi di . . , Mantenere la parola. Aver finito. Impcdire di . . . Accendere uno di . . . Baciare la mano ad uno. Esser carico di . . . Beffarsi di . . . Prodigare a . . . Far sapere ad uno. Caricare di . . . Guar dare una cosa. Cercare una cosa. Guar dare ad una cosa. Perdere uno di vista. There is another thing to be done. Money is a mere nothing in com- parison with honor. For fear of being too long. Man is the only hero in Chris- tianity. When I reached the summit of the mountain, I knelt and prayed. EXAMPLES. Vi e un' ultra cosa dafarsi. 11^ denaro e un mere nulla a con fronto deWonore. Temendo di dilungarmi troppo. JVcl Cr^'^tianesimo nan vi e ultra eroe che ruomo. Quando giunsi uUa vetta del viontey mHnginocchiai e pregai. • - EXERCISE. 103 EXERCISE LIX. Who is this newly-born child, brought to the church of St. John the Baptist, in Florence, to be baptized? Why does the ago rejoice at his appearance into the world ? Has he not a human form? Is he not of flesh and bones ? Yes ; he is a child like all other children ; but the Omnipotent God has touched his forehead with his Divine finger, and has imparted to him the gift of a creative mind. The child becomes a man, and, with the voice of an inspired prophet, cries out to a slumbering nation Rise ! and the nation, at the sound of that stirring trumpet, awakes from a lethargy of twenty ages, and rises to light and glory. This great genius, before whom all men of merit have bowed with wonder and admiration, was the first to perceive that art and science must harmonize with religion ; that for a Christian the sufferings, joys, hopes, and interests, of this world, were but a mere nothing in comparison with the immense hap- piness of an eternal life ; that between the birth of the first man and the day of the last judgment there was humanity ; that between the Genesis and the Apocalypse there was a book to be- made, and he imagined and produced it, elevating man, by the gradual and progressive development of sentiments, emotions, and aspirations, from a handful of dust in human shape, to a spiritual being contemplating the Divinity, and longing for a world of joy and bliss. This great star in the horizon of modern literature is Dante Alighieri ; the wonderful book is the Divine Comedy. Far from imitating Homer and Virgil, in representing gods, demigods, and heroes, with the gravity and solemnity of a style more elevated than the language commonly spoken, the Christian poet felt that the only hero in Christianity is man ; that the principles of charity and fraternity had already proscribed from the human race every mark of distinction ; that men were all equal ; that the humblest among them was the first in the sight of God. Overruled by this grand idea, he endeavored to represent man as he is; and, adopting the common language, he gave to his production the title of Comedy, which was afterwards acknowl- edged as the Divine Comedy. I must close here, for fear of being too long ; but I will endeavor to finish my course of exercises by giving you an outline of the poem in my next and last lesson. 194 IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. LESSON LXI IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. To take notice of a person. To be obliged to one for . . . To be offended at . . . To offer one to . . . To omit to . . . To oppose some one. To pardon one for a fault. To part with . . . To permit one to . . . To pillage a city. To play upon an instrument. To be pleased with . . . To praise one for an action. To present one with a thing. To pretend to . . . To prevent one from . . . To prey upon a thing. To pride one's self in . . . To profit by . . . To promise one a thing. To propose to . . . To provide one's self with . . . To put on a fair face. To be qualified for . . . To question a thing. To receive of . . . To recompense for . , , To reflect on . . . To refuse to . . . To refuse one a thing. To rejoice at . . . To rely on . . . To repent for . . . Salutare una persona. Essere ohhligato ad uno di . . Offendersi di . . . Offrire ad uno di , . . Omettere di . . . Opporsi a qualcuno. Perdonare un fallo ad uno. Disfarsi di . . . Permettere ad uno di , . . Dare ilsacco ad una citta. Sonare uno strumento. Compiacersi di . . . Lodare Vazione di uno. Donare una cosa ad uno. Far semhiante di . . . Impedire ad uno di . . . Divorare una cosa. Gloriarsi di . . . Profittare di . . . Promcttere una cosa ad uno, Proporre di . . . Provvedersi di . . Fare buon viso. Esser hen alto a . . . Dubitare di una cosa. Ricevere da . . . Ricompensare di . . . Riflcttere a . . . Ricusare di . . . Neffare una cosa ad uno. Ralkgrarsi di . . . Far capitate di . . . Pentirsi di . . , IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS AND EXERCISE. 195 To require a thing of one. To resemble one. To resound with . . . To be respectful to . . . To reward for . . . To be satisfied with . . . To scatter with . . . To seem to be so. To set one at liberty. To shelter one. To sit for one's picture. To be smitten with . . . To be sorry for . . . To steal a thing from . . . To take example from one. To take from one's hand. To take one in. To teach one. To think of... To throw one's self from . . . To throw one's self on . . . Tired with . . . Trample upon a thing. To fall a victim to . . . To make much of a person. To make free with . . . To make one laugh. To make a present of a thing. To marvel at ... . To be master of a thing. To meddle with . . . To meditate on . . . To take notice of a thing. Richicdcre una cosa da uno. Somigliare ad uno. Risuonare di . . . Esscre rispcttoso verso . . . Ricompensare di . . . Contentarsi di . . , Spargcre di . . . Rarer cos\. Dar la liberta ad uno . Dar ricovero ad uno. Farsi dipingere. Essere innamorato di . . , Dolersi di . . . Ruhare una cosa a . . . Imitare uno. Tor di mano ad uno. Jngannare uno. Jnsegnare ad uno. Pensare a . . . Precipitarsi di . . . Lanciarsi a . . . Stanco di . . . Calpestare una cosa. Esser la vitiima di . . , Far civilta ad una persona. Non far cerimonie con . . . Dar di che ridere ad uno. Donare una cosa. Maravigliarsi di . . . Saper perfettamente uiyx cosa. Impicciarsi di . . . Meditare di . . . Osservare una cosa. EXERCISE LX. The spirit which pervades the whole poem of Dante is that of religion and morality. The Divine Comedy is the expression of a man eminently pious and devout, the pouring out of a heart 196 EXERCISE. beating with intensity of feeling, to benefit and instruct man- kind. The poem is divided into three parts : Hell, Purgatory, and Paradise ; in other words, Punishment, Expiation, and Howard. The personages most prominent are three : Dante, Virgil, and Beatrice. The Inferno has nine levels ; the Purga- torio, nine degrees ; the Paradise, nine spheres. The inferno ia represented as an inverted, hollow, truncated cone, commencing from the surface of the earth with a diameter of three hundred miles, and reaching its centre with a diameter of half a mile. In following the poet through the dark abysses, we find that this ia not the place for the cast down, and for those destitute of means to buy a passport to heaven ; but, on the contrary, it is destined for those who are really wicked, without excepting cardinals, popes, and personages of high rank. In this first part of the poem, viewed with a scientific eye, the poet limits himself to questions concerning geology and mineralogy ; but, what is more impor- tant to be noticed, and what, I think, has been overlooked by many, is, that Dante was acquainted with the theory of the cen- tre of gravitation of the earth — a discovery which was, several ages afterwards, attributed to Newton. The mountain of pur- gatory is placed on the surface of the earth ; its form is just the reverse of that of the inferno. Here the sufferers, instead of being attracted to the centre of the earth by the weight of their sins, are patiently toiling in ascending the mountain, and, becom- ing gradually lighter by repentance and expiation, they reach the summit, where they find the terrestrial paradise. Here the poet, left by Virgil, — representing human reason, — finds a new guide in his Beatrice, symbolizing Divine Wisdom. The Para- dise of Dante is based on the system of Ptolemeus, that the earth was the nucleus or centre of the universe. Here the poet, true model of a man eminently religious and devout, felt the impossi- bility of our limited intelligence to define the Supreme Being ; consequently, after having soared upon the wings of an exalted imagination from sphere to sphere, and described the various degrees of blessedness of the happy beings, which he could detect by the gradual increase of rapidity in motion, and of intensity in splendor, he reaches the source of every light and motion, and bows down before the Divinity in wonder and amazement. AUXILIARY VERBS. 197 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS AVERE, TO ILVVE. ESSERE, TO BE. GERUND. Avendo or coif avcre, having. Esscndo or colV essere, being. PAST PARTICIPLE. Avuio, had. Siato, been INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. lo ho. lo sono Tu hai. Tusei Effli ha, poet. have. Egli e. Noi ahbiamo. Noi siamo. Vol avete. Voi siete. Eglino hanno, or han. Eylino sono, or son. IMPERFECT . Aveva or avca. Era. Avevi. Eri. Avhva or avca. Era. Avevamo. Eravamo. Avevaie. Eravate. Avevano or avcano, p. aviano. Erano. PERFECT. EbU. Fui. Avesti. Fosti. Ebbe. Fu. Avemmo. Aveste. Fummo. Foste. Ebbero or ebber. Furono, ^.furo oifur. FUTURE. Avro. Sard. Avrai. Sarai. Avra. Sara, ^.fia. Avremo. Saremo. Avrete. Sarete. Avranno. Saranno, p. Jiano. 198 AUXILIARY VERBS. CONDITIONAL. Avrei or avria. Sarei, saria, p. fora. Avresti. Saresti. Avrebbe or avria. Sarebbe, saria, p. fora. Avremmo. Saremmo. Avreste. Sareste. Avrebbero or avriano Sarebbero , sariano , p. forano. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT Che to abbia. Che io sia. Che tu Mia. Che tu sii, or sia. Che egli abbia. Che egli sia. Che noi abbiamo. Che noi siamo. Che vol abbiate. Che voi siate. Che eglino bbbiano Che eglino s\ano. IMPERFECT. Se io avessi. Se io fossi. Se tu avessi. Se tu fossi. Se egli avesse. Se egli fosse. Se noi avessimo. Se noi fossimo. Se voi aveste. Se voi foste. Se eglino avessero. Se eglino fossero. IMPERATIVE : MOOD. Abbi. Sii or sia. Abbia. Sia. Abbiamo. Siamo. Abbihte. Siate. Abbiano. Slano or sieno. N. B. — The compound tenses of these auxiliary verbs are formed t)y adding the past participle of their own verbs to the simple tenses- Io ho avutOj Io sono stato, Io aveva avuto, Io era stato, Io avrei avuto, Io sarei stato, REGULAR VERBS. loy REGULAR VERBS. First Goiyugaticn. Second Conjugation. Third Conjugation. dMARE, TO LCVE. TEMERE, TO FEAK. PART IRE, TO DEPAlll GERUND. Am-andoj loving. Tem-cndo, fearing. Part-cndo, departing. Am-ato, loved. PAST PARTICIPLE. Tem-uto, feared. Part-ito, departed PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Am-ante, loving. Tcm-ente, fearing. Part-eiite, departmg INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Am-o. Tem-0. Part-o Am-i. Tem-i. Part-i. Arn-a. Tem-e. Part-e. Am-iamo. Tem-iamo. Part-iamo Am-ate. Tem-ete. Part-\te. Am-ano. Tem-ono. IMPERFECT. Part-ono Am-ava. Tem-eva or ea. Part-iva. Am-avi. Tem-evi. Part-ivi. Am-ava. Tem-eva or ea. Part-iva. Am-avamo. Tem-evamo. Part-ivamo. Am-avate. Tem-evate. Part-ivate. Am-avano. Tem-evano or eano. PERFECT. Part-ivano. Am-ai. Tem-ei or etti. Part-ii. Am-asti. Tem-esti. Part-isti. Am-b. Tem-e or ette. Part-\. Afn-cLTTtmo, Tem-emmo. Part-immo, A.m-aste. Tem-este. Part-lste. Am-arono Tcm-erono or ctlero. Part-irono. 200 REGULAR VERBS. FUTURE. Am-erb. Tem-erb. Part-irb. Am-erai. Tcm-crai. Part-irai. Am-cra. Tern-era. Part-ira. Am-eremo. Tem-eremo. Part-iremo. Am-erete. Tem-erete. Part-irete. Am-eranno. Tem-eranno. CONDITIONAL. Part-iranno. Am-erei or eria. Tem-erei or eria. Part-irei or ir\a. Am-eresti. Tcm-eresti. Part-iresti. Am-erebhe overia. Tcm-erebbe or eria. Part-irebbe or iria Am-eremmo. Tem-eremmo. Part-iremmo. Am-ereste. Tem-ereste. Part-iresie. Am-erebbero. Tem-erebbero. Part-irebbero SUBJUNCTIYE MOOD. PRESENT. Che io am-i. Tem-a. Part-a. . Chetuam-i. Tem-a. Part-a. Che egli am-i. Tem-a. Part-a. C/ie noi am-iamo. Tem-iamo. Part-iamo. Che vol am-iate. Tem-iate. Part-iate. Che eglino am-ino. Tem-ano. IMPERFECT. Part-ano. Se to am-assi. Tem-lssi. Part-issi. Se tu am-assi. Tem-essi. PartAssi. Se egli am-asse. Tem-esse. Part-\sse. Se noi am-assimo Tem-essimo. Part-issimo . Se voi am-aste. Tem-este. Part-\ste. Se egli am-assero. Tem-ess?ro. IMPERATIVE. Part-isscro. Am-a. Tem-i. Part-i. Am-i. Tem-a. Part-a. Am-iamc Tem-iamo. Part-iamo. Am-ate. Tem-ete. Part-ite. Xm-ino. Tem-ano. Part-ano, IRREGULAR VERBS. 201 niREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION INFINITIVE MOOD. ANDARE, DARE, FARE, STARE, TO GO. TO GIVE. TO DO. TO STAY. GERUND. Andando. Dando. Facendo. Stando. PAST PARTICIPLE. Andato. Dato. Fatto. Staio. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Vado. Do. Faccio or fo. Sto. Vai. Dai. Fat. Stai. Va. Da. Fa. Sta. Andiamo. Diamo. Facciamo. Stamo. Andate. Date. Fate. State. Vanno. Danno. Fanno. IMPERFECT. Stanno. Andava. Dava. Faceva. Stava. Andavi. Davi. Facevi. Stavi. Andava. Dava. Faceva. Stava. Andavamo. Davamo. Facevamo. Stavamo. Andavate. Davate. Facevate. Stavate. Andavano. Davano. Facevano. PERFECT. Stavano. Andai. Diedi or detti Feci. Stetti. Andasti. Desti. Faces ti. Stesti. Andb. Diede, deite, die. Fece or/e. Stette. Andammo. Demmo. Facemmo. Stemmo. Andaste. Deste. Faceste. Steste. Andarono. Diedero, dettero. Fecero or feronc >. Stettero. N B. — RiandarBt to review, trasandare, to neglect, are regular 202 IRREGULAR VERBS. , FUTURE. Andrb. Darb. Farb. Stard. Andrai Darai, Farai, Starai. Andra. Dara. Fara, Stara. Andremo. Daremo, Faremo. Staremo. Andrete. Darete. Farete, Slarete. Andranno. Daranno. Faranno . Star anno. CONDITIONAL. Andrei, Darei p. daria. Farei, p./< iria, Starei p. staria Andrestu Daresti. Faresti. Staresti, Andrebbe. Darebbe. Farebbe, Starebbe. Andremmo. Daremmo. Faremmo. Slaremmo. Andreste. Dareste. Fareste, Stareste, Andrebbero. Darebbero. Farebbero. Siarebbero. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Vada. Dia, Faccia, Stia, Vada, Dia. Faccia, Slia. Vada. Dia, Famia, Stia. Andiamo, Diamo. Facciamo. Stiamo. Andiate, ■ Diate. Facciaie, Stiate. Vadano. Diano. Facciano. IMPERFECT. Stiano. Andassi. Dassi. Facessi. Stassi or stessi. Andassi. Dassi . Faces si. Stassi or stessi. Andasse. Dasse, Facesse, Slasse or stesse. AndassimOi Dassimo. Faces simo. Stassimo or stessimo. Andaste. Daste, Faceste. Staste or steste. Andasscro. Dasscro. Faccsscro. Stassero or stessero. 1^" The following compound verbs are also irregular: Riandare, to go again. Addarsi, to addict. Ridare, to give again. Ristare, to stop. Distare, to be distaut. Soprastare, to delay, to temporize. APPENDIX. 203 VERBS OF THE TIHRD CONJUGATION IN WHICH THE TERmNATION ISCO IS INDISPENSABLE Abbellire, Abbonire, Abbrividiro, Abbronzire, Abbrostolire, Abbruttire, Abolire, Abortire, Accalorire, Accanire, Accolorire, Accudire, Acetire, Addolcire, Aderire, Affievolire, Affortire, Affralire, Aggrandire, Agguerrire, Agire, AUeggerire, Allenire, Allestire, Amarire, Ambire, Ammanire, Ammansire, Ammattire, Ammollire, Ammonire, Ammorbidiro, Ainmortire, Ammutiro, Ainmutolire, Anneghittire, Annorire, Annichilire, Annobilire, Apparire,* Appassire, Appetire, Appiccinire, Appigrire, Ardire,f Arricchire, Arrossire, Arrossirsi, Arrostire, Arrozzire, Arrugginire, Arruvidire, Assalire,* Asserire, Assopire, Assordire, Assortire, Assoggettire, Atterrire, Attribuire, Attristire, Attutire, Avvilire, Avvizzire, Balbuttire, Bandire, Benedire,* Bianchire, Blandire, Brandire, Brunire, Candire, Capiro, Chiarire, Circuire, Colorire, Colpire, Comparire,* Compartire, Compatire, Concepire, Condire, Conferire, Construire, ContribuirGj Contrire, Costruire, Castodire, Deferire, Definire, Demolire, Differire, Diffinire, Digerire, Diminuirej Disasprire, Disseppelliro, Disfavorire, Disfinire, Disgradire, Disimpedire, Disparire,* Dispartire, Disruvidire, Distribuire, Disubbidire, Disvigorire, Disunire, Erudire, Esaudiro, Esaurire,J Esibire, Esinanire, Fallire, Fastidire, Favorire, Ferire, Finire, Fiorire, Fluire, Fornire, Fruire, Garantire, Garrire, * See list of irregular verbs. t Ardire, to dare, borrows from osare, to dare, the words osiamo, osiate, osancl9 because ardiamo, ardiate, ardendo, belong to the verb ardere^ to bvirn. I Past participle esaurito and esausto. 204 APPENDIX. Gestire, Ghermire, Gioire,* Gradire, Granciro, Granire, Gremire, Grugnire, Guaire, Gualcire, Guarire, Guarnire, lUaidire, lUanguidire, lUingaidire, Imbaldanzire, Imlbaldire, Imbalsimire, Imbandire, . Embarberire,! Imbarbogire, Imbastardire, Imbastire, Imbelliro, Imbestialire, Imbianchire, Imbiondire, Imbizzarrire, Imbolsire, Imbonire, Imbottire, Imbozzacchire, Imbricconire, Imbranire, Imbruschire, Imbruttire, Immagrire, Immalinconire, Immalvagire, Immarcire, Immattire, Impadronire, Impallidire, Impaurire, Impazientire, Impedire, Impervertire, Impiccolire, Impidocchire, Impigrire, Impoltronire, Impostemire, Impoverire, Improsperire, Impuntire, Imputridire, Impuzzolire, Inacerbire, Inacetire, Inacidire, Inacutire, Inagrire, Inalidire, Inanimire, Inaridire, Inasinire, Inaspire, Inavarire, Incagniro, Incallire, Incalviro, Incancherire, Incanutire, Incaparbire, Incappoccbire, Incaponire, Incapriccire, Incarognire, Incatarrire, Incatozzoliro, Incattivire, Incenerire, Incerconire, Inciprignire, Incivilire, Incodardire, Incollerire, Incoragire, Incrudelire, Incrudire, Indebolire, Indocilire, Indolcire, Indolent ire, Indolenzire, Indurire, Inerire, Infarcire, Infastidire, Infellonire, Infemminire, Inferire, Inforociro, Infervorire, Infiaccliire, InJSevolire, Infingardire, Infistolire, Influire, Infallire, Infortire, Infracidire, Infragilire, Infralire, Infrigidire, Ingagliardire, Ingelosire, Ingentilire, Ingerirsi, Ingiallire, Ingiovanire, Ingobbire, Ingrandire, Inlividire, Innuzzolire, Inorgoglire, Inorridire, Inquisire, Insalvatiohire Insanire, Inschiavire, Ineerire, Insignire, Insignorire, Insipidire, Insolentire, Insollire, Insordire, Insospettire, Insozzire, * Defective in the first and second persons plural of the two presents, t Often written imbarbarire. APPENDIX. 205 Instupidire, Istituiro, Rancidire, Rinvezzire, lasuperbire, Istolidire, Rapire, Rinvigorire, Inteaebrire, Istruire, Rattiepidire, Rinvilire, Intenerire, Largire, Ravvilire, Ripartire, Intiepidiro, Leniro, Rawincidire, Ripartorire, IntigQosiro, Malodiro,* Redarguire, Ripulire, Intiinidiro, Marcire, Rcstituiro, Risalire,* Intimorire, Muniro, Retribuire, Risarcire, Intirannire, Obbedire, Riabbcllire, Risbaldire, Intirizzire, Oliro, Riagire, Risquittire, Intisichire, Ordire, Riapparire,* Risteccliire, Intorbidire, Ostruire, Riarricchire, Ritrosire, Intormentire, Par tire, Ribadire, Riunire, Intorpidire, Partorire, Ribandire, Riverire, Intristire, Patire, Richiarire, Salire,* Inumidire, Pattuire, Ricolorire, Saporire, Invaghire, Percepire, Riconcepire, Sbaldanzire, Invanire, Piatire, Ricondire, Sbalordiro, Inveire, Polire, Ricostruire, Sbandire, Invelenire, Poltrire, Riferire, Sbigottire, Inverminire, Preferire, Rifiorire, Sbizzarrire, Invigorire, Presagire, Rimbambire, Scalfiro, Invitire, Preterire, Rifrondire, Scarnire, Invincidire, Proferire, Rifronziro, Scaturire, Inviperire, Progredire, Ringontilire, Schermire, Inviscidiro, Proibire, Ringioire, Schiarire, Invizzire, Pulire, Ringiovanire, Schiattire, fnvolpire, Punire, Ringiovialire Sciapidire, Inzoti(?bire, Putire, Ringrandire, Scipidire, Irretire, Rabbellire, Rinsanire, Scolorire, Irricchire, Rabbonire, Rinsavire, Scolpire, Irrigidire, Raddolcire, Rinsorenire, Scomparire, Irritrosire, Raggentilire, Rinsignorire Scompartire, Irruginire, RammoUire, Rintenerire, Semenzire, luterilire, Rammorbidire 1, Rintiepidire, Seppellire, See list of irregular verbs. 206 APPENDIX. Sfavorire, Soprassalire,* Statuire, Suggerire, Sfinire, Sortire,! Stecchire Supplire, Sfornire, Sostituire, Sterilire, Tradire, Sgarire, Spar ire,* Stizzire, Traferire, Sghermire, Spar tire, Stolidire, Trainortire, Sgomentire, Spaurire, Stordire, Trasferire, Sgradire, Spedire, Stormire, Trasgredire, Sinagrire, Spervertire, Stramortire, Trasparire,* Smaltire, Spessire, Stremenzire, Trasricchire, Smarrire, Squittire, Stupidire, Ubidire, Sminuire, Stabilire, Stupire, Unire. Smunire, Sruginire, Svanire, Usucapire, Sopire, Starnutire, Svelenire, Vagire. * See list of irregular verbs. t Sortire, to draw lots, has the present in isco ; but sortire, to go out, is a regu^ iar verb. LIST OF VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WITH THE PRESENT ENDING BOTH IN O AND ISCO. Abborrire, Adompire,* ' Applaudire, Assaporire, Assorbire, Avvertire, Bollire,t Carpire, Compire,* Convertire,! Disinghiottire, Divertire, Empire,* Forbire, Impazzire, Inghiottire, Inverdire, Investire, Lambire, Languire, Mentire, Muggire,^ Nudrire, Nutrire, Offrire,|| Offerire,|| Pervertire, Riforbire, Rinverdire, Rinvestire, Ruggire,^ Schernire, Soffrire,|| Sowertire,J Tossire, Travestire. * The present in o is taken from the verbs adempiere, compiere, tmpiere, ao4 mA'k.es adempio, compio, empio. \ Bollire, to boil, makes bogliamo, bogliate ; because bolliamo, bolliate, belong to the verb bollare, to seal. J We may also say conversi, converso ; soiwer/ii, sowerso, § Better, mugyisco, ruggisco, rmtggiscono, ruggiscono. I The past participle is offerto, soj'erto. IRREGULAR VERBS. 207 LIST OF IRREGULiVR VERBS. J^ Verbs marked with an • will be found in a separate list. Term in. Infln. Fast. Future. Past part. -endere. Accendere, Accesi, Reg. Acceso. Appendere, Appesi, Reg. Appeso. Apprendere, Appresi, Reg. Appreso. Arrendere, Arresi, r. Reg. Arreso . Attendere, Atteei, Reg. Atteso. Ascendere, Ascesi, Reg. Asceso. Comprendere, Compresi, Reg. CompresQ Condiscendere, Condiscesi, Reg. Condisceso* Contendere, Contesi, Reg. Conteso. Difendere, Difesi, r. Reg. Difeso. Disapprendere, Disappresi, Reg. Disappresc Discendere, Discesi, Reg. Disceso. Distendere, Distesi, Reg. Disteso. Estendere, Estesi, Reg. Esteso. Fendere, Fessi, r. Reg. Fesso, r. Imprendere, Impresi, Reg. Impreso. Incendere, Incesi, Reg. luceso. Intendere, Intesi, Reg. Inteso. Intraprendere, Intrapresi, Reg. Intrapreso. OflFendere, Offesi, Reg. Offeso. Prendere, Presi, Reg. Preso. Pretendere, Pretesi, Reg. Preteso. Protendere, Protesi, Reg. Proteso. Prostendere, Prostesi, Reg. Prosteso. Rendere, Resi, r. Reg, Reso. Riaccendere, Riaccesi, Reg. Riacceso. Riprendere, Ripresi, Reg. Ripreso. Scendere, Scesi, Reg. Sceso. Scoscendere, Scoscesi, Reg. Scosceso. Soprapprendere , Soprappresi Reg. Soprappreso. Sopraintendere, Sopraintesi, Reg. Soprainteso. Spendere, Spesi, Reg. Speso. Sopraspendere, Sopraspesi, Reg. Sopraspeso. Sorprendere, Sorpreei, Reg. Sorpreso. 208 IRREGULAR VERBS. Termin. Infln. Past. Future. Past pa . Stendere, Stesi, Reg. Steso. Tendere, Tesi, Reg. Teso. Trascendere, Trascesi, Reg. Trasceso Vilipendere, Vilipesi, Reg. Vilipeso Airre. Addurre,* Addussi, Addurro, Addotto. Indurre,* Indussi, Indurrb, Indotto. Dedurre,^ Dedussi, Dedarrb, Dedotto. Condurre,* Condussi, Condurro , Condotto. Produrre,* Produssi, Produrro, Prodotto. -arire. Apparire,* Apparvi, r. Reg. Apparso, r. Comparire,! Comparvi, Reg. Comparso. Disparire, Disparvi, Reg. Disparito. Riapparire, Riapparvi, r. Reg. Riapparso, r Sparire, Sparvi, r. Reg. Sparito. Trasparire, Trasparvi, r. Reg. Trasparito. -prire. Aprire,J Apersi, r. Reg. Aperto. Coprire, Copersi, r. Reg. Coperto. Discoprire, Discopersi, r. Reg. Discoperto Ricoprire, Ricopersi, r. Reg. Ricoperto Scoprire, Scopersi, r. Reg. Scoperto ardere. Ardere.^ Arsi, Reg. Arso. Riardere,^ Riarsi, Reg. Riarso. Astere. Assistere, Afisist-ei or etti, Reg. Assistito. Esistere, Esist-ei or etti. , Reg. Esistito. •umere . Assumero, Assunsi, Reg. Assunto. Consumere, Consunsi, Reg. Consunto. Desumere, Desunsi, Reg. Desunto. Presumere, Presunsi, r. Reg. Presunto. Riassumere, Riassunsi, Reg. Riassunto. 'dire. Dire,* Dissi, Diro, Detto. Bendiro,* Bondissi, Bendirb, Bendetto. Benedire,* Benod-issi or ii , Reg. Benedetto. Contraddire,* Contraddissi, Reg. Contraddetto. • Jppare and appaiono may be used instead of apparisce, appariseono. t Compaio and compaiono are used instead of compariscoy compariscono X Petrarcli lias used opra instead of apra. § With the auxiliary verbs avere and essere, in its compound tenses IRREGULAR VERBS. 209 Vermiz I. Infln. Past. Future. Past part. Maldire,* Maldissi, Reg. Maldotto. Maledire,* Malod-issi or ii, Re^. Maledetto. Predire,* Predissi, Reg. Predetto. -bere. Bere,» Bewi, bovei. , Bero, Bevuto. -adere Cadere, Caddi, Cadro, r. Caduto. Accadere,* Accaddi, Accadr6,r '. Accaduto. Decadere, Decaddi, Decadr6,r '. Decaduto Dissuadere Dissuasi, Reg. Dissuaso. Ricadere, Ricaddi, Ricudro, r . Ricaduto. Scadere, Scaddi, Scadr5, r. Scaduto. Persuadere, Persuasi, Reg. Persuaso. -alere. Calere,"^ Calsi, Reg. Caluto. Valere/ Valsi, Varrb, ValutOjValso Prevalere," Prevaisi, Prevarro, Prevaluto. -edere.- j- Cedere, Cessi, r. Reg. Ceduto. Concedere, Concessi, r. Reg. Concesso, r. Intercedere, Intercessi, r . Reg. Interce8so,r. Ledere, Lesi, Reg. Leso. Succedere, Success!, r. Reg. Successo, r. Chiedere,! Chiesi, Reg. Chiesto. Riedere,* Def. Def. Def. 'iidere. Chiudere, Chiusi, Reg. Chiuso. Alludere, AUusi, Reg. Alluso. Acchiudere, Acchiusi, Reg. Acchiuso. Conchiudere,^ Conchiusi, Reg, Conchiuso. Deludere, Delusi, Reg. Deluso. Inchiudere,^ Inchiusi, Reg. Inchiuso. Illudero, Illusi, Reg. Illuso. Racchiudere, Racchiusi, Reg. Bacchiuso. Rinchiudere, Rinchiusi, Reg. Rinchiuso. -eplre. Concepire, Concepii, Reg. Concepito. Percepire. Percepii, Reg. Percepito. * Used only in the third person. t Accedere, eccedere, procedere, precedere, are regular verbs \ The d is often changed, in poetry, to gg ; as, chieggo, ckiegga, instead of ciictto, ckieda. § Often written concludire., includere. 10 210 APPENDIX. TermiE L. In fin. Past. Future. Past part. -oscere. Conoscere, Conobbi, Reg. Conosciuto. Kiconoscere, Riconobbi, Reg. Riconosciuta Sconoscere, Sconobbi, Reg. Sconosciuto. . orrere, , Correre, Corsi, Reg. Corso. Accorrere, Accorsi, Reg. Accorso. Concorrere, Concorsi, Reg. Concorso. Decorrere, Decorsi, Reg. Decorso. Discorrere, Discorsi, Reg. Discorso. Incorrere, Incorsi, Reg. Incorso. Occorrere, Occorsi, Reg. Occorso. Percorrere, Percorsi, Reg. Percorso. Precorrere, Precorsi, Reg. Precorso. Ricorrere, Ricorsi, Reg. Ricorso. Soccorrere, Soccorsi, Reg. Soccorso. Trascorrere, Trascorsi, Reg. Trascorso. •escere. Crescere, Crebbi, Reg. Cresciuto. Accrescere, Accrebbi, Reg. Accresciuto, Decrescere, Decrebbi, Reg. Decresciuto, Increscere, Increbbi, Reg. Incresciuto. Mescere, Mescei, Reg. Misto. Rincrescere, Rincrebbi, Reg. Rincresciuto •ucire. Cucire,a Cucii, Reg. Cucito. Scucire,* Scucii, Reg. Scucito. Sdrucire,* Sdrucii, Reg. Sdrucito. 'Ubcere . Cuocere,* Cossi, Cocero, Cotto. Concuocere, Concossi, Concocerb , Concotto. Nuocere, Nocqui, Nocer6, Nociuto. Ricuocere, Ricossi, RicocQro, Ricotto. -Igere. Negligere, Neglessi, Reg. Negletto. Dirigere, Diressi, Reg. Diretto. Erigere, Eressi, Reg. Eretto. Esigere, Esigei, Reg. Esatto. 4n^tiere.D istinguero , Distinsi, Reg. Distinto. Estinguero, Estinsi, Reg. Estinto. * Verbs with the diphthong uo oniit the u whenever the accent falls on any ithef rowel but the o of this diphthong, or when followed by a double consonant. APPENDIX. 211 Termin. Infln. Fast. Future. Past part. -overe. Dovere,* Doveioretti, Dovrb, Dovuto. '<>ndere . Fondere, Fusi, r. Reg. Fuso, r. Confondere, Confusi, Reg. Confuso. Ascondere, Ascosi, Reg. Ascoso. Diffondere, Diffusi, Reg. Diffuse. Effondere, Effusi, Reg. Effuso. In fondere, InfuBi, Reg. Infuso. Rifondere, Rifusi, Reg. Rifuso. Sconfondore, Sconfusi, Reg. Sconfuso. Trasfondere, Trasfusi, Reg. Trasfuso. Nascondere, Nascosi, Reg. Nascosto. -ellere. Espellere,* Espulsi, Reg. Espulso. Divellere,a Divelsi, Reg. Divelto. Impellere,* Impulsi, Reg. Impulso. Repellere,* Repulsi, Reg. Repulso. Compellere,* Compulsi, Reg. Compulso. Convellere,* Convulsi, Reg. Convuko. Svellere,* Svelsi, Reg. Svelto. -ervere. . Fervere, Fervei, Reg. Def. -iedere. Fiedere,f Fiedei, Def. Def. -give. Gire,» Gii, Reg. Gito or Ito. -adere. Invadere, Invasi, Reg. Invaso. Radere, Rasi, r. Reg. Raso. -iggere. , Figgere, Fissi or fisi. Tteg. Fitto or Fisso. Affiggere, Affissi, Reg. Affisso. Configgere, Confissi, Reg. Confitto. Crocifiggere, Crocifissi, Reg. Crocifisso. Prefiggere, Prefissi, Reg. Prefisso. Sconfiggere, Sconfissi, Reg. Sconfitto. Trafiggere, Trafissi, Reg. Trafitto. A ffl iggere, Afflissi, Reg. Afflitto. Friggere, Frissi, Reg. Fritto. Soffriggere, Soffrissi, Reg. Soffritto. * Of but little use in the language. t Fiedere is defective in the first and second persons plural of the Indicative and iubjunctive present, and but little used. :ivz APPENDIX. Terrain. Infln. Fast. Future. Past part. -unc/ere, Giungere,* Giunsi, Reg. Giunto. Aggiungere, Aggiunsi, Reg. Aggiunto. Cobgiungere, Congiunsi, Reg. Congiunto. Ingiungere, Ingiunsi, Reg. Ingiunto. Raggiungere, Raggiunsi, Reg. Raggiunto. Soggiungere, Soggiunsi, Reg. Soggiunto. 'idere. Ridere, Risi, Reg. Riso. Arridere, Arrisi, Reg. Arriso. Deridere, Derisi, Reg. Deriso. Dividere, Divisi, Reg. Diviso. Elidere, Elisi, Reg. Eliso. Intridere, Intrisi, Reg. Intriso. Irridere, Irrisi, Reg. Irriso. Sorridere, Sorrisi, Reg. Sorriso. Suddividere, Suddivisi, Reg. Suddiviso. -e£f(/ere. Leggere, Lessi, Reg. Letto. Eleggere, Elessi, Reg. Eletto. . Correggere, Corressi, Reg. Corretto. Proteggere, Protessi, Reg. Protetto. Reggere, Ressi, Reg. Retto. Rileggere, Rilessi, Reg. Riletto. Sorreggere, Sorressi, Reg. Sorretto. Scorreggere, Scorressi, Reg. Scorretto. erffere. Ergere, Ersi, Reg. Def. Emergere, Emersi, Reg. Emerso. Immergere, Immersi, Reg. IniTnerso. Dimergere, Dimersi, Reg. Dimerso. Sommergere, Sommersi, Reg. Sommerso. Tergere, Tersi, Reg. Terso. Aspergere, Aspersi, Reg. Asperso. Astergere, Astersi, Reg. Asterso. Detergere, Detersi, Reg. Deterso. 4//ere. Mcttere, Misi, Reg. Messo. Ammettere, Ammisi, Reg. Ammesso. Annettere, AnneBsi, r. Reg. Annosso. Commettere, Commisi, Reg. Com messo. * Of but little use in the language. — Verbs ending in ungere often transpose th« Kg when the following vowel is e or t , as, giu'jnc, giugni, or giunge, giungi. APPENDIX. 2U Termio \. Infln. Past. Future. Paat part. Connettere, Connessi, r. Reg, Oonnesso, r. Dimettere, Dimisi, Reg. D!me8so. Dismettere, Dismisi, Reg. Dismesso. Frammettere, Frammisi, Reg. Frammesso. Intromettere, Intromisi, Reg. Intromesso. Promettere, Promisi, Reg. Promcsso. Rimottere, Rimisi, Reg. R!me8S0. Scommettere, Scommisi, Reg. Scommesso. Sconnettere, Sconnessi, r, . Reg. Sconnesso. Spromettere, Spromisi, Reg. Spromesso. •brdere . Mordere, Morsi, Reg. Morso. Rimordere, Rimorsi, Reg. Runorso. 'Orire. Morire,* Morii, Morro, Morto. 'Ubvere . Muovere, Mossi, Movero, Mosso. 'hscere. , Nascere, Nacqui, Nascer6, Nato. -frire. Offrire, Ojffersi, r. Reg. Offerto. Soffrire, Soffersi, r. Reg. Sofferto. ^ferire. Proferire, Profersi, r. Reg. Proferito. Riferire, Rifersi, r. Reg. Riferito. Amere. Opprimere, Oppress!, Reg. Oppresso. Comprimere, Compressi, Reg. Compreseo. Esprimere, Espressi, Reg. Espresso. Imprimere, Impressi, Reg. Impresso. Deprimere, Depress!, Reg. Depresso. Reprimere, Repress!, Reg, Represso. Redimere, Redensi, r. Reg. Redento. -arere. Parere,a Parv!, Parro, Parso, r. -erdere. , Perdere, Pers!, r. Reg. Perso, r. Disperdere, Dispersi, Reg. Disperse. -acere. Piacere,* Piacqui, Reg. P!ac!uto. Compiacere,* Comp!acqiii. , Reg. Comp!ac!uto. Dispiacere,^ Dispiacqui, Reg. Disp!ac!uto. Giacere,* Giacqui, Reg. G!aciuto. Ripiacere,* Rip!acqui, Reg. Rip!ac!uto. Spiacere,* Sp!acqiii, Reg. Spiac!uto. Tacere,* Tacqu!, Reg. •Tac!uto. -hngere. Piangere, Piansi, Reg. Pianto. 214 APPENDIX. Termin. Infln Fast. Future. Past part. Frangere, Fransi, Reg. Franto. 'tngei-e Pingere, Pinsi, Reg, Pinto. Dipingere, Dipinsi, Reg. Dipinto. Attingere, Attinsi, Reg. Attinto. Tingere, Tinsi, Reg. Tinto. Ritingere^ Ritinsi, Reg. Ritinto. Stringere, Strinsi, Reg. Stretto. Fingere, Finsi, Reg. Finto. Infingere, Infinsi, Reg. Infinto. Cingere, Cinsi, Reg. Cinto. Accingere, Accinsi, Reg. Accinto. Incingere, Incinsi, Reg. Incinto. Ricingere, Ricinsi, Reg. Ricinto. Scingere, Scinsi, Reg. Scinto. Spingere, Spinsi, Reg. Spinto. Respingere, Respinsi, Reg. Respinto. Sospingere, Sospinsi, Reg. Sospinto. Astringere, Astrinsi, Reg. Astretto. Costringere, Costrinsi, Reg. Costretto. Distringere, Distrinsi, Reg. Distretto. Ristringere, Ristrinsi, Reg. Ristretto. 'bvere. Piovere,* Piowe, r. Reg. Piovuto. -otkre, Potere,* Potei, Potro, Potuto. '<)rgere. Porgere, Porsi, Porgero, Porto. Accorgere, Accorsi, Reg. Accorto. Assorgere, Assorsi, Reg. Assorto. Risorgere, Risorsi, Reg. Risorto. Scorgere, Scorsi, Reg. Scorto. Sorgere, Sorsi, Reg. Sorto. brre. Porre,» Posi, Porro, Posto. Coinppre,a Oppdrre,* Composi, Comporro, Composto. Opposi, Opporrb, Opposto. Scomporre,* Scomposi, Scomporr6, Scomposto. Interporre/ Interposi, Interporro, Interposto. \ndere. Scindoro, Scinsi, Reg. Scinto. * Defective, used only In the third persons. Termin. Infln. APPENDIX. Past. Future. Past part. Discindere, Discinsi, Keg. Discinto. Rescindere, Rescinsi, Reg. Rescinto. :^«//€r€.Riflettere, Riflettei, Beg. Riflettuto. Inflettere, Inflettei, Reg. Inflesso. Circonflettere, Circonflettei , Reg. Circonflesso Genuflettere, Genuflettei, Reg. Genuflesso. "ulgere. Rifulgere, Rifulsi, Reg. Def. -iicere. Rilucere, Rilussi, r. Reg. Def. -anere. Rimanere,* Rimasi, Rimarrb, Rimasto. -bndere. Rispondere, Risposi, Reg. Risposto. -bdere. Rodere, Rosi, Reg. Roso. Corrodere, Corrosi, Reg. Corroso. -bmpere. Rompero, Ruppi, Reg. Rotto. Corrompere, Corruppi, Reg. Corrotto. Dirompere, Diruppi, Reg. Dirotto. Interrompere, Interruppi, Reg. Interrotto. Prorompere, Proruppi, Reg. Prorotto. -atire. Salire,* Salii, Reg. Salito. Assalire,* Assalii, Reg. Assalito. Soprassalire,« Soprassalii, Reg. Soprassalito Risalire,* Risalii, Reg. Risalito. •^fere. Sapere,* Seppi, Sapro, Saputo. "Igliere. Scegliere,* Scelsi, Reg. Scelto. Prescegliere,* Prescelsi, Reg. Prescelto. Trascegliere,* Trascelsi, Reg. Trascelto. '•hgliere. Sciogliere,* Sciolsi, Reg. Sciolto. Disciogliere,* Disciolsi, Reg. Disciolto. Prosciogliere,* Prosciolsi, Reg. Prosciolto. 4t;ere. Scrivere, Scrissi, Reg. Scritto. Ascrivere, Ascrissi, Reg. Ascritto. Coscrivere, Coscrissi, Reg. Coscritto. Descrivere, Descrissi, Reg. Descritto. Iscrivere, Iscrissi, Reg. Iscritto. Prescrivere, Prescrissi, Reg. Prescritto. Proscrivere, Proscrissi, Reg. Proscritto. Riscrivere, Riscrissi, Reg. Riscrittd. Soscrivere, SoBcrissi, Reg. Soscritto. 2ia APPENDIX. Termin. Infin- Past. Future. Past -part. Sottoscrivere, Sottoscrissi, Reg. Sottoscritto, 'ubtere. , Scuotere, Scossi, Scotero, Scosso. Percuotere, Percossi, Percuotero, Percosso. Riscuotere, Riscossi, Riscuotero, Riscosso. -e^uire. . Seguire,* Seguii, Reg. Seguito. Conseguire,a Conseguii, Reg. Conseguito. Proseguire,a Proseguii, Reg. Proseguito. Susseguire,* Susseguii, Reg. Susseguito. •oVere. Dolere,* Dolsi, Dorrb, Doluto. Solere,* Def. Def. Solito. Volere,a Volli, Vorrb, Voluto. -argere . Spargere, Sparsi, Beg. Sparso. -eynere . Spegnere,a Spensi, Reg. . Spento. Aiggere . Struggere, Strussi, Reg. Strutto, Distruggere, Distrussi, Reg. Distrutto "Cnere, Tenere,a Tenni, Terro, Tenuto. Appartenere,« ' Appartenni, , Apparterro, Appartenuto. Attenere,* Attenni, Atterro, Attenuto. Contenere,a Contenni, Con terro, Contenuto. Ditenere,* Ditenni, Diterro, Ditenuto. Mantenere,a Mantenni, Man terro, INIantenuto. Ottenere,* Ottenni, Otterro, Ottenuto. Ritenere,* Ritenni, Riterro, Ritenuto. Sostenere,* Sostenni, Sosterro, Sostenuto. ^gliere . Cogliere,t Colsi, Coglierb, Colto4 Accogliere, Accolsi, Accogliero, Accolto. Ricogliere, Ricolsi, Ricogliero, Ricolto. Togliere, Tolsi, Torr6, r. Tolto. Distogliere, Distolsi, Distorro, Distolto. Ritogliere, Ristolsi, Ritorro, Ritolto. -hrcere. Torcere, Torsi, Reg. Torto. Attorcero, Attorsi, Reg. Attorto. Contorcere, Con torsi, Reg. Contorto. Distorcere, Distorsi, Reg. Distorto. *In the past and future it makes fui solito, sard solito, etc. t Often written corre. t The of thts past participle bas a abort sound. C6lto is used in poetry toi toUivato, educated. APPENDIX. 217 Termla. Infln. Past. Future. Fast part. Estorcere, Estorsi, Reg. Estorto. Ritorcero, Ri torsi, Reg. Ritorto. Storcere, Storsi, Reg. Storto. •^rre. Trarre,* Trassi, Trarro. Tratto. Astrarre,* Astrassi, Astrarro, Astratto. Attrarre,* Attrassi, Attrarro, Attratto. Contrarre,* Contrassi, Con trarro, Contratto. Detrarre,* Detrassi, Detrarro, Detratto. Estrarre, Estrassi, Estrarro, Estratto. Ri trarre/ Ritrassi, Ritrarro, Ritratto. Protrarre,"^ Pro trassi, Pro trarro. Protratto. Sottrarre,* Sottrassi, Sottrarro, Sottratto. Adere. Assidere,* Assisi, Reg. Assiso. Uccidere, Uccisi, Reg. Ucciso. Conquidere, Conquisi, Reg. Conquiso Decidore, Decisi, Reg. Deciso. Precidere, Precisi, Reg. Preciso. Recidere, Recisi, Reg. Reciso. Uccidere, Uccisi, Reg. Ucciso. -udXre. Udire,a Udii, Udr6, Udito. '\vere. Vivere, Vissi, Reg. Vissuto, r. Convivere, Convissi, Reg. Convivuto. Rivivere, Rivissi, Reg. Rivivuto. Soprawivere, Sopravvissi, Reg. SopravYivuta '■edere. Vedere,* Vidi, Vedro, Veduto. Antivedere,* Antividi, Antivedro, Antiveduto. Awedere,* Awidi, Avvedrb, Aweduto. Divedere,* Dividi, Divedrb, Diveduto. Prowedere,* Prowidi, Provvedrb, Proweduto. Prevedere,* Previdi, Prevedro, Preveduto. Ravvedere,* Ravvidi, Rawedro, Ravyeduto. Sprowedere,^ SprovYidi , Sprowedero; , Sproweduto. Travedere,"^ Travidi, Travedro, Traveduto. Sedere,* Sed-ei, etti, Sedr6, Seduto. Risedere,"^ Reg. Risedro, Riseduto. Possedere,* Possedei, Possedro, Possoduto. * Reflective verb. 218 APPENDIX. Tennir I. Infin. Past. Future. Past part. Soprassedere,' ' Soprassedei, Soprassedro. , Soprasseduto -eiiire. Venire,'^ Venni, Verro, Venuto. Avvenire,a Avvenni, Awerro, Avvenuto. Addivenire,* Addivenni, Addiverro, Addivenuto. Convenire,* Con venni, Converro, Convenuto. Divenire,* Divenni, Diverro, Divenuto. Prevenire,'^ Prevenni, Preverro, Prevenuto. Provenire,* Pro venni, Proverro, Provenuto. Rinvenire,* Rinvenni, Rin verro. Rinvenuto. Soprawenire,' " Soprawenni ,Sopravverr6. , Soprawenuto. Sowenire,* Sowenni, Sovverro, Sowenuto. -incere. , Yincere, Vinsi, Reg. Vinto. Awincere, Awinsi, Reg. Awinto. Convincere, Convinsi, Reg. Convinto. -uscire. Uscire,* Uscii, Reg. Uscito. Riuscire,* Riuscii, Reg. Riuscito. •hlgere. Volgere, Volsi, Reg. Volto. Avvolgere, Awolsi, Reg. Awolto. Involgere, Involsi, Reg. Involto. S volgere, Svolsi, Reg. Svolto. Travolgere, Travolsi, Reg. Travolto. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION WITH THE ACCENT ON THE LAST SYLLABLE BUT ONE. Godere, Sedere, Tenero, Parere, Solere, Valere, Piacere, Suadere, Vedere, Potere, Tacere, Volere. Temere, Calere, Cadere, Dolere, Dovere, Giacere, REGULAR VERBS OF THE THHID CONJUGATION. Consentire, Dormire, Pentirsi, Sdrucire, Vestire Conventire, Fuggire, Seguire, Servire, Cucire, Partire, Sentire, Sortire, With their compounds ; as, scurire, proseguire. APPENDIX. 219 LIST OF EXCEPTIONAL IRREGULARITIES OF VERBS. AddurrCf formerly adducere. Present Ind. AdducOj adducij adduce j adduciamo, adducetCy adducono. Imperfect. Adduceva, adducevij adducevay addticevamOf addu- cevate, adducevano. Indurre, like addurre, Dcdurre, like addurre. Condurre, like addurre. Produrre, like addurre. Dire, formerly dicere. Present Ind. DicOj diet, dice^ diciamo^ dite^ dicono. Imperfect. Diceva .... Bendire, like dire. Benedire. Two present, one in isco, the other like dire. Contraddire, like benedire. Maldire, like dire. Maledire, like dire. PredirCf like dire. Bere, forms the present and imperfect, from hevere. Bevo, bevi . . Beveva, bevevi . . . Calere, defective verb, used only in the third persons ; as, cale, caleva, calse, cafflia, calesse. Valere, Pres. Ind. Valgo, vali, vale, valiamo, valete, valgono, or vagliono. Prevalere, like valere. Riedere, defective verb, used only in the present indicative and subjunctive, and in the imperfect. Cucire, Pres. Ind. Cucio, cud, cuce, cuciamo, cucite, cuciono. Scucire, like cucire. Sdrudre, like cucire. Dovere, Pres. Ind. Devo, or debho, devi, deve, dobbiamo, dovete, devono. Pres. Sub. Bebba, debba, debba, dobbiamo, dobbiate, debbano or devano. In poetry, it is used, deggio, dei, dee, deggiamo ; denno, deg- giono, or deono. Svellere, Pr. Ind. Svello or svelgo, svelli, svelle, svelliamo, siiellete, svellono, or svelgono. 2i20 APPENDIX. Divellere, like svcllere. Girey Def. Verb. It has only ffiamo, giate, gite, in the two pres- ents and imperative. It may be supplied by the Latin verb vadcre ; as, vado, vai, va, giamo, gite, vanno. Morirc, Pres. Ind. Muoro or muoio, muori, muove^ moriamoy morite, muorono or muoiono. Parere, Pres. Ind. Paio, pari, pare, pariamo, parete, parono or paiono. Piacere, Pres. Ind. Piaccio, piaci, place, piacciamo, piacete, piac- ciono. Pres. Sub. Piaccia, piaccia, piaccia, piacciamo, piacciate, piac- ciano. Imperative. Piaci, piaccia, piacciamo, piacciate, piacciano Compiacere, like piacere. Dispiacere, like piacere. Giacere, like piacere. Ripiacere, like piacere. Spiacere, like piacere. Tacere, like piacere. Potere, Pres. Ind. Posso, puoi, pud, possiamo, potete, possono. Pres. Sub. Possa, possa, possa, possiamo, possiate, possano. Imperative. Possa, possa, possiamo, possiate, possano. Porre, from ponere. Pres. Ind. Pongo, poni, pone, poniamo, ponete, pongono. Imperfect. Poneva, ponevi, poneva . . . Comporre, like porre. Opporre, like porre. Scomporre, like porre. Interporre, like porre. Rimanere, Pres. Ind. Rimango, rimani, rimane, rimaniamo rimanete, rimangono. Satire, Pres. Ind. Salgo or salisco, salt or salisd, sale or salisce, sagliamo, salite, salgono or saliscono. Pres. Sub. Saiga, saiga, saiga, sagliamo, sagliate or saliate, salgano. Assalire, like salire. Soprassalire, like salire. Risalire, like salire. APPENDIX. 221 SaperCj Pres. Ind. So, sai, sa, sappiamo, sapete, sanno. Pres. Sub. Sappia, . . . sappiamo, sappiate, sappiano. Imperative. Sappi, sappia, sappiamo, sappiate, sappiano. Scegliere or scerre, Pres. Ind. Scelgo, scegli, sceglie, sceyliamo scegliete, scelgono. Pres. Sub. Scelga or sceglia, . , . scelgano ot scegliano. Imperative. Scegli, scelga or sceglia, scegliamo, scegliete, sceh gano or scegliano. Prescegliere, like sccgliere. Trascegliere, like scegliere. Scioglicre or sciorre, Pres. Ind. Sciolgo or scioglio, sciogli, scio' glie, scogliamo, sciogliete, sciolgono or sciogliono. Disciogliere, like sciogliere. Prosciogliere, like sciogliere. Seguire, Pres. Ind. Seguo or sieguo, segui or siegui, segue oi siegue; seguiamo, seguite, seguono or sieguono. Conseguire, like seguire. Perseguire, like seguire. Proseguire, like seguire. Susseguire, like seguire. Dolere, Pres. Ind. Dolgo, duoli, duole, dogliamo, dolete, dolgono. Pres. Sub. Bolga, dolga, dolga, dogliamo, dogliale, dolgano. Volere, Pres. Ind. Voglio or vo, t?Moi, rwo/e, vogliamo, volete, vogliono. Pres. Sub. Voglia, voglia, voglia, vogliamo, vogliate, vogliano. Imperative. Vogli, voglia, vogliamo, vogliate, vogliano. Spegnere, Pres Ind. Spengo, spegni, spegne, spegniamo, spegnete spengono. Tenere, Pres. Ind. Tengo, tieni, tiene, teniamo, ienete, tengono. Appartenere, like tenere. Attenerey like tenere. Contenere, like tenere. Ditenere, like tenere. Mantenere, like tenere. Ottenere, like tenere. Ritenere, like tenere. Sostenere, like tenere. Trarre, from /roere, Pres. Ind. Traggo, trai, trae, iraiamo, traete, traggono. 222 APPENDIX. Astrarre, like trarre. AttrarrCj like trarre. Contrarre, like trarre. Detrarre, like trarre. Estrarre, like trarre. Ritrarre, like trarre. Protrarre, like trarre. Sottrarre, like trarre. TJdire, Pres. Ind. O^o, odi, ode^ udiamo, udite, odono. TJscire, Pres. Ind. Esco^ esci, esce, usciamo, uscite, escono. Riuscrire, like uscire. Vedere, Pres. Ind. Vedo, veggo or veggio, vedi, vede, vediamo o, veggiamo, vedete, veggono or veggiono. Antivedere, like vedere. Avvedere, like vedere. Rivedere, like vedere. Provvedere, like vedere. Prevedere, like vedere. Ravvedere, like vedere. Jmprovvedere, like vedere. Travederey like vedere. Sedere, Pres. Ind. <&'e6?o or seggo, siedi, siede, sediamo^ sedete siedono or seggono. Risedere, like sedere. Possedere, like sedere. Soprassederej like sedere. Venire^ Pres Ind. Vengo, vienij vieney veniamo, venite, vengono, Awenire, like venire. Addivenire, like venire. Convenire, like venire. Divenirej like venire. Prevenire, like venire. Proveniref like venire. Rivenire, like venire. Rinvenire, like venire. Sorvenire, like venire. Sopravvvenire, like venire. Sovvenirej . like venire. APPENDIX. 223 MASCULINE NOUNS ENDING IN A. Amacorota,* Anagramma, Analemma, Anatema, Antagonista,* Apostata,* Apostema, Apotegma, Artista, Assioma, Asma, Atoista,* Ateroma, Automa, Borea, Calvinista,* Chitarrista,* Clima, Deicida,* Beista,* Diadema, Dilemma, Diploma, Domma, Dramma, Duca, Emblema, Enimma, Epigramma, Ensimena, Entomata, Eremita,* Eresiarca, Fantasma,* Fisima, Fraticida,* Gesuita, Idioma, Idiota,* Ippocrita,* Macchinista,* Materialista, Matricida,* Monarca, Monopolista,* Omicida, Papa, Parricida * Patriarca, Patriotta, Pianeta,* Poeta, Poema, Prisma, Problema, Proclama, Profeta, Programma, Realista,* Kegicida,* Reuma, Scisma, Sistema, Sofisma, Sofista, Sperma, Stemma, Stratagemma, Tema, Teorema, Tetrarca, Timiama. * Used also for the feminine : as, un anacoreta, and una anacoreta. NOUNS ENDING IN CO AND GO, WHICH TAKE OR REJECT THE H. Analogo, Apologo, Astrologo, Chirurgo, Dialogo, Dittongo, Domestico, Equivoco, Farmaco, Mendico, Monaco, Pratico, Reciproco, Salvatico, Statico. 224 APPENDIX. MASCULINE NOUNS WITH TWO PLURALb Anello, Fondamento, Mure, Braccio, Frammento, Orecchio, Budello, Frutto, OSBO, Calcagno, Fuso, Peccato, Carro, Gesto, Porno, Castello, Ginoccliio, Prato, Cerchio, Gomito, Pugno, Cervello, Granello, Quadrello, Ciglio, Grido, Riso, Coltello, Guscio, Sacco, Comandamento, Labbro, Strido, Corno, Legno, Tino, Cuoio, Lenzuolo, tJrlo, Ditello, Letto, Vestigio, Dito, Membro, Vestimento. Filo, Mulino, NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES ENDING IN CO AND GO PRECEDED BY A VOWEL, WHICH TAKE AN H IN THE PLURAL. Abaco, Farmaco, Presage, Abbaco, Fondaco, Prodigo, Antico, Impiego, Prolago, Aprico, Intrigo, Pudico, Beccafico, Manico, Rammarico, Caduco, Monologo, Ripiego, Carico, Obbligo, Sacrilego, Castigo, Opaco, Scarico, Catalogo, Parroco, Stomaco, Dialogo, Pelago, Traffico, Dimentico, Pedagogo, Ubbriaco, Dittongo, Publico, Usbergo. . APPENDIX. 225 IRREGULAR FEIMININES. Abate, Badessa. Gallo, Gallina. Barone, Baronessa. Leone, Leonessa. Cane, Cagna. Marchese, Marchesa. Canonico, Canonichessa. Mercante, Mercantessa. Cantante, Cantatrice. Oste, Ostessa. Conte, Contessa. Padrone, Padrona. Dio, Dea. Papa, Papessa. Diavolo, Diavolessa. Pavone, Pagonessa. Dottore, Dottoressa. Principe, Principesaa. Duca, Duchessa. Pastore, Pastorella. Elefanto, Elefantessa. Priore, Prioressa. Eroe, Eroina. Profeta, Profetessa. Fattore, Fattoressa. Re, Regina. Filosofo, Filosofessa.* Sartore, Sarta. * Used onl y in derision. LIST OF EQUIVOCAL WORDS. E like e in me t. E more open. Accetta. Axe. He accepts. Affetta. He cuts into slices. He afiects. Bet. Thou drinke St. Beautiful. Cera. Wax. Aspect. Colletto. Little hill. Collected. Desti. Thou didst { 5ive. Awaken. Detti. Words. I gave. Esca. Bait. Go out. Fello. He did it. Felon. Teste. You did it. Festivals. Lega. He binds. A league. Legge. Law. He reads. Lessi. Boiled. I read. Letto. Bed. Read. Mele. Apples. Honey. Messe. Masses. Harvest. Pesca. The fishing. A peach. Pesco. I fish. A peach-tree. z^ APPENDIX. Peste. Trampled. Plague. Tema. Fear. Theme. Temi. Thou fearest. Themes. Veglio. I watch. Old man. Velio. See him. A skin. Venti. Twenty. Winds. close. open. Accorre. He runs. To receive Accorto. I shorten. Prudent. Botte. A cask. Blows Colla. With the. Glue. Colle. With the. A hill. Collo. With the. Neck. Color 0. I color. Those. Colto. Refined. Gathered. Corre. He runs. To gather Costa. It costs. A rib. Folia. Crowd. I do it. Fosse. Were he. Ditches. Indotto. Induced. Ignorant. Ora. Now, hour. *He prays. Orno. To adorn. A wild ash. Porsi. To put one's self. I offered. Pose. He put. Pauses. Posi. I put. Let him rest. Pasta. Placed. The post-office. Ricorre. He has recourse. He reaps. Riposi. I concealed. Rests. Rosa. Rotten. A rose. Scopo. I sweep. Scope. Sole. The sun. He is accustomed. Sono. I am. I play. Tomo. I fall. Volume. Torre. A tower. To take away. Torta. A pie. Twisted. Volgo. The plebeians. I turn. Volto. Face. Turned. Voto. Vow. Vacant. APPENDIX. 227 EXTRACT FROM IL CARMAGNOLA OF MANZONI. misere, sa il Cielo Che per voi sole ei m'6 tremendo. Awezzo 10 son da lungo a contemplar la morte, E ad aspettarla. Ah ! sol per voi bisogno IIo di coraggio ; e voi — voi non vorrete Tormelo, e vero? AUor che Iddio sui buoni Fa cader la sciagura, ei dona ancora 11 cor di sostenerla. Ah ! pari il vostro Alia sciagura or sia. Godiam di questo Abbracciamento : e un don del Cielo anch' esso. Figlia, ta piangi ; e tu consorte ! . . Ah ! quando Ti feci mia, sereni i giorni tuoi Scorreano in pace ; — io ti chiamai compagna Del mio tristo destin : questo pensiero Mi awelena il morir. Deh ch' io non veggia Quanto per me sei sventurata ! ^ grande il torto ; Ma perdona, e vedrai che in mezzo ai mali Un' alta gioia anco riman. — La morte ! II pill crudel nemico altro non puote Che accelerarla. — Oh ! gli uomini non hanno Inventata la morte : ella saria Rabbiosa, insopportabile : — dal Cielo Ella ne viene, e I'accompagna il Cielo Con tal conforto, che n^ dar ne torre Gli uomini ponno. — sposa, o figlia, — udite Le mie parole estreme : amare, il veggio, Vi piombano sul cor ; ma un giorno avrete Qualche dolcezza a rammentarle insieme. — Tu sposa, vivi — il dolor vinci, e vivi ; Questa infelice orba non sia del tutto : Fuggi da questa terra, e tosto ai tuoi La riconduci — ella e lor sangue — ad esei Fosti SI cara un di : — consorte poscia Del lor nemico, il fosti men ; le crude 228 APPENDIX. Ire di Stato awerSi fean gran tempo De' Carmagnola e de' Yisconti il nome. — Ma tu riedi infelice ; il tristo oggetto Dell' odio e tolto : — e un gran pacier la morte. E tu, tenero fior, tu che fra I'arini A rallegrare il mio pensier venivi, — Tu chini il capo ; — oh ! la tempesta rugge Sopra di te — tu tremi, ed al singulto Pill non regge il tuo sen — sento sul petto Le tue infocate lagrime cadermi ; E tergerle non posso ; — a me tu sembri Chieder pietk, Matilde ; ah ! nulla il padre Puo far per te ; — ma pei diserti, in cielo V e un padre, il sai. — Confida in esso, e vivi Ai di tranquilli, se non lieti ; ei certo Te li destina. Ah ! per che mai versato Tutto il torrente dell' angoscia avria Sul tuo mattin, se non serbasse al resto Tutta la sua pietk ? — Vivi, e consola Questa dolente madre. — Oh ch' ella un giorno A un degno sposo ti conduca in braccio ! — ... CORO. S' ODE a deetra uno squillo di tromba ; A sinistra risponde uno squillo : D'ambo i lati calpesto rimbomba Da cavalli e da fanti il terren. Quinci spunta per I'aria un vessillo ; Quindi un altro s' avanza spiegato : Ecco appare un drappello schierato ; Ecco un altro che incontro gli vien. Gib. di mezzo sparito h il terreno , Gik le spade rispingon le spade ; L'un dell'altro le immerge nel seno , Gronda il sangue ; raddoppia il ferir. — Chi son essi ? Alle belle contrade Qual ne venne stranioro a flir guerra ? APPENDIX. 229 Qual h quel che ha giurato, la terra Dove nacque, far salva, o morir ? D'una terra son tutti : un linguaggio Parian tutti : fratelli li dice Lo straniero . il commune lignaggio A ognun d'essi dal volto traspar. Questa terra fu a tutti nudrice, Questa terra di sangue ora intrisa, Che Natura dall' altro lia divisa, E recinta coU'Alpe e col mar. Ahi ! Qual d'essi il sacrilege brando Trasse il prime il fratello a ferire ? Oh terror ! Del conflitto esecrando La cagione esecranda qual' e? — Non la sanno : a dar morte, a morire Qui senz' ira ognun d'essi e venuto ; E venduto ad un duce vcnduto, Con lui pugna, e non chiede il perchfe. Ahi sventura ! Ma spose non hanno Non han madri gli stolti guerrieri ? Perche tutte i lor cari non vanno Dall'ignobile campo a strappar ? E i vegliardi che ai casti pensieri Delia tomba gia schiudon la mente, Ch^ non tentan la turba furente Con prudenti parole placar ? — Come assise talvolta il villano Sulla porta del clieto abituro Segna il nembo die scende lontano Sovra i campi che arati ei non ha ; Cosi udresti ciascun che sicuro Vede lungi le armate coorti, Raccontar le migliaia de'morti, E la pieta dell'arse cittk. Lk, pendenti dal labbro materno Vedi i figli, che imparano intenti A distinguer con nomi di scheme Quel che andranno ad uccidere un di , 230 APPENDIX. Qui, le donne, alle veglie lucenti Dei monili far pompa e dei cinti, Che alle donne deserte dei vinti II marito o I'amante rapi. — Ahi sventura ! sventura ! sventura * Gik la terra e coperta d'uccisi ; Tutta e sangue la vasta pianura ; Cresce il grido, raddoppia il furor. Ma negli ordini manchi e divisi Mai si regge, gih, cede una schiera ; Gik nel volgo, che vincer dispera, Delle vita rinasce I'amor. Come il grano lanciato dal pieno Ventilabro nell' aria si spande ; Tale intorno per I'ampio terreno Si sparpagliano i vinti guerrier. Ma improvvise terribili bande Ai fuggenti s'affaccian sul calle ; Ma si senton piii presso alle spalle Scalpitare il temuto destrier. Cadon trepidi a pie dei nemici, Rendon I'arme, si danno prigioni : H clamor delle turbe vittrici Copre i lai del tapino che muor. Un corriero h salito in arcioni ; Prende un foglio, il ripone, s'awia, Sferza, sprona, divora la via ; Ogni villa si desta al romor. Perche tutti sul pesto cammino Dalle case, dai campi accorrete ? Ognun chiede con ansia al vicino, Che gioconda novella rec6 ? Donde ei venga, infelici, il sapete, E sperate che gioia favelli ! I fratelli hanno ucciso i fratelli : Questa orrenda novella vi do. Odo intorno festevoli gridi ; S'orna il tempio, e risuona del canto « APPENDIX. 231 Oik s'innalzan dai cuori omicidi Grazie ed inni die abbomina il Ciel. Giu dal cerchio dell'Alpi frattanto Lo staniero gli Bguardi rivolve ; Vede i forti che mordon la polve, E li conta con gioia crudel. — Affrettatovi, empito la schiere, Sospendete i trionfi ed i giuochi, Eitornate alle vostre bandiere ; Lo straniero discende ; egli e qui. Vincitor ! Siete deboli e pochi ? Ma per questo a sfidarvi ei discende ; E voglioso a quel compi v' attende Ove il vostro fratello peri. — Tu che angusta a' tuoi figli parevi*, Tu che in pace nutrirli non sai, Fatal terra, gli estranei ricevi : Tal giudizio comincia per te. Un nemico che offeso non hai, A tue mense insultando s' asside ; Degli stolti le Bpoglie divide ; Toglie il brando di,mano a'tuoi re. Stolto anch' esso ! Beata fu mai Gente alcuna per sangue ed oltraggio ? Solo al vinto non toccano i guai ; Torna in plan to dell'empio il gioir. Ben talor nel superbo viaggio Non I'abbatte I'eterna vendetta : Ma lo segna ; ma veglia ed aspetta ; Ma lo coglie all' estremo sospir. Tutti fatti a sembianza d' un Solo ; Figli tutti d' un solo riscatto, In qual' ora, in qual parte del suolo Trascorriamo quest' aura vital, Siam fratelli ; siam stretti ad un patto ; Maledetto colui che lo infrange, Che s'innalza sul fiacco che piange, Che contrista uno spirto immortal ! 232 APPENDIX. EXTRACT FROM ALFIERI'S ORESTE Antica usanza ogni quint' anno in Creta Giuochi rinnova e sacrifizii a Giove. Desio di gloria e natural vaghezza Tragge a quel lido il giovinetto : al fiance Pilade egli ha non divisibil mai. Calda brama d'onor nell' ampia arena Su lieve carro a contrastar lo spinge De' veloci corsier la nobil palma ; Troppo a vincere intento, ivi la vita Per la vittoria ei dk Feroce troppo, impaziente. incauto, Or coUa voce minacciosa incalza, Or del flagel, cbe sanguinoso ei ruota, Si forte batte i destrier suoi mal domi Ch' oltre la meta volano, piii ardenti Quanto veloci piii. Gia sordi al freno, Gik sordi al grido, ch' ora invan gli acqueta Foco spiran le nari ; all' aura i crini Svolazzan irti : e in denso nembo awolti D 'agonal polve, quanto h vasto il circo, Corron, ricorron come folgor ratti. Spavento, orrore, alto scompiglio e morte Per tutto arreca in torti giri il carro Finche percosso con orribil urto A marmorea colonna il fervid' asse Riverso Oreste cadde lo non diro, come di sangue il piano Rigasse, orribilmente strascinato Pilade accorse . . . invan . . . fra le sue braccia Spiro I'amico, .... INDEX. PAGI Preface m Introduction, v Pronunciation, 1 Accent, 5 Reading Exercise, 9 Nouns, 11 Definite Article, 13 Personal Pronouns ; Auxiliary Verb to have, 14 Formation of the Plural, 16 Possessive Pronouns, 19 Articles affixed to Prepo^tions, 21 Auxiliary Verb to be, 22 Adjectives, 24 Verbs, First Conjugation, 27 Demonstrative Adjectives, 30 Personal Pronouns, 82 Indefinite Article, 35 Partitive Article, 36 Formation of the Plural, continued, 38 Months, Days, Seasons, 39 Irregular Verbs to go and to give, 41 Conjunctive Pronouns, 43 Irregular Verbs to make and to stay, 46 Use of the Definite Article, 48 Relative Pronouns, 51 Demonstrative Pronouns, 54 Regular Verbs of the Second Conjugation, 65 Omission of the Definite Article. — Interjections, ...... 57 Conjunctions, 58 Numeral Adjectives, GO 11 •234 INDEX. Interrogative Pronouns, 64 t^ Kegular Verbs, Third Conjugation, 67 Hours of the Day : Half past, a quarter past, a quarter of, . . . 68 Conjunctive Pronouns, continued, 71 Table of Compound Conjunctive Pronouns, 73 yt Remarks on the Regular Verbs, 75 Collective and Distributive Numbers, 76 Ordinal Numbers, 78 Proportional Numbers, 79 Irregular Verbs, 81 ■"y Agreement of Verbs. — Use of the Imperfect and Perfect, .... 86 / Comparatives, 89 Superlatives, 92 Irregular Comparatives and Superlatives, 93 Possessive Pronouns, continued, 95 ^ Use of the Subjunctive, 98 '^ Past Participle, 102 Formation of the Plural, continued, 105 Augmentatives and Diminutives, 108 ^ Adverbs, Ill Indefinite Pronouns used substantively for Pei*sons, 115 Indefinite Pronouns used substantively for Things, 118 Indefinite Pronouns used substantively for Persons and Things, .111 Indefinite Pronouns used adjectively for Persons and Things, . .124 Formation of the Feminine, 127 Prepositions di, a, 130 Prepositions c?a, ^er, in/Mon, 133 / Use of the Third Person Feminine, 137 Idiomatic Expressions with the verbs av^rc^ to have, and cssere, to be 138 ^ Of the Pronoun si 140 Synonyms : Fear, paura, timore ; to rub, strofmare, stropicciare. — Idiomatic Expressions "with the Verbs andare, to go, and ^^ starCy to stay, 141 ^- Ellipses, 143 ^ Idiomatic Expressions with the Verb daret to give, 144 Ellipses, continued, Ii6 INDEX. 235 Idiomatic Expressions with the verb /are, to make 147 Diminution of Words, 149 Maxims and Figures of Speech, 150 Diminution of Words, continued, 152 Maxims and Figiu-es of Speech, 153 Transposition of Words, 155 Synonyms: Step of a staircase, i;'ra^3n' 65-5PM m€0^)uii' FEB 319bZ 26 May 63 PS 1/0 21-100m-7,'40(69S6a) YB 00604 7yn r^ 7/ 77 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY